]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
MIPS/GAS/testsuite: Convert branch local list tests to dump tests
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
2571583a 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
2571583a 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
2571583a 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
387dd777
DP
831@kindex -plugin @var{name}
832@item -plugin @var{name}
833Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
834the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
835automatically added by the complier, when using link time
836optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
837wish.
838
839Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
840from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
841@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
842those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
843copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
844based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
845just copy in the newest one.
846
26278bb8
UD
847@kindex --push-state
848@cindex push state governing input file handling
849@item --push-state
850The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
851flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
852restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
853
854The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
855@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
856@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
857@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
858@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
859@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
860
861One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
862used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
863listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
864something as follows:
865
866@smallexample
867-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
868@end smallexample
869
870@kindex --pop-state
871@cindex pop state governing input file handling
872Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
873flags governing input file handling.
874
a712da20
NC
875@kindex -q
876@kindex --emit-relocs
877@cindex retain relocations in final executable
878@item -q
879@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 880Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
881Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
882order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
883in larger executables.
884
dbab7a7b
NC
885This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
886
4f471f39
RS
887@kindex --force-dynamic
888@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
889@item --force-dynamic
890Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
891to VxWorks targets.
892
252b5132
RH
893@cindex partial link
894@cindex relocatable output
895@kindex -r
1049f94e 896@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 897@item -r
1049f94e 898@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 899Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 900turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
901linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
902magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
903@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 904@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
905If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
906linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
907constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
908
62bf86b4
HPN
909When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
910partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
911relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
912example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
913with input files in other formats at all.
914
252b5132
RH
915This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
916
917@kindex -R @var{file}
918@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
919@cindex symbol-only input
920@item -R @var{filename}
921@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
922Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
923relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
924to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
925programs. You may use this option more than once.
926
ff5dcc92 927For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 928followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 929the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
930
931@kindex -s
932@kindex --strip-all
933@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 934@item -s
252b5132
RH
935@itemx --strip-all
936Omit all symbol information from the output file.
937
938@kindex -S
939@kindex --strip-debug
940@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 941@item -S
252b5132
RH
942@itemx --strip-debug
943Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
944
945@kindex -t
946@kindex --trace
947@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 948@item -t
252b5132 949@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 950Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
951
952@kindex -T @var{script}
953@kindex --script=@var{script}
954@cindex script files
955@item -T @var{scriptfile}
956@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
957Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 958@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 959@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
960output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
961the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
962specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
963options accumulate.
252b5132 964
14be8564
L
965@kindex -dT @var{script}
966@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
967@cindex script files
968@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
969@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
970Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
971
972This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
973processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
974command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
975@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
976behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
977command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
978the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
979@samp{gcc}).
980
252b5132
RH
981@kindex -u @var{symbol}
982@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
983@cindex undefined symbol
984@item -u @var{symbol}
985@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
986Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
987symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
988modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
989different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
990option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
991
0a618243
AB
992If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
993into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
994undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
995instead.
996
997@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
998@cindex symbols, require defined
999@cindex defined symbol
1000@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1001Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1002is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1003is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1004and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1005@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1006can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -Ur
1009@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1010@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1011For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1012@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1013turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1014@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1015It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1016with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1017be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1018@samp{-r} for the others.
1019
c005eb9e
AB
1020@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1021@cindex orphan sections
1022@cindex sections, orphan
1023@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1024Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1025specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1026
1027@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1028
1029@table @code
1030@item place
1031Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1032the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1033@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1034
1035@item discard
1036All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1037@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1038
1039@item warn
1040The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1041issue a warning.
1042
1043@item error
1044The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1045@end table
1046
1047The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1048
577a0623
AM
1049@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1050@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1051Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1052@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1053missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1054specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1055multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1056input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1057in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1058
252b5132
RH
1059@kindex -v
1060@kindex -V
1061@kindex --version
1062@cindex version
1063@item -v
1064@itemx --version
1065@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1066Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1067lists the supported emulations.
1068
1069@kindex -x
1070@kindex --discard-all
1071@cindex deleting local symbols
1072@item -x
1073@itemx --discard-all
1074Delete all local symbols.
1075
1076@kindex -X
1077@kindex --discard-locals
1078@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1079@item -X
252b5132 1080@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1081Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1082system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1083or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1084
1085@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1086@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1087@cindex symbol tracing
1088@item -y @var{symbol}
1089@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1090Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1091option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1092to prepend an underscore.
1093
1094This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1095don't know where the reference is coming from.
1096
1097@kindex -Y @var{path}
1098@item -Y @var{path}
1099Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1100for Solaris compatibility.
1101
1102@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1103@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1104The recognized keywords are:
1105@table @samp
1106
1107@item combreloc
1108Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1109lookup caching possible.
1110
b8871f35
L
1111@item common
1112Generate common symbols with the STT_COMMON type druing a relocatable
1113link.
1114
cd6d6c15 1115@item defs
560e09e9 1116Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1117shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1118
6aa29e7b
JJ
1119@item execstack
1120Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1121
b039ef04
L
1122@item global
1123This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1124the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1125of subsequently loaded libraries.
1126
cd6d6c15
NC
1127@item initfirst
1128This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1129It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1130before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1131the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1132the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1133objects.
1134
1135@item interpose
1136Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1137but the primary executable.
1138
5fa222e4
AM
1139@item lazy
1140When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1141dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1142the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1143Lazy binding is the default.
1144
cd6d6c15
NC
1145@item loadfltr
1146Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1147runtime.
1148
1149@item muldefs
1150Allows multiple definitions.
1151
1152@item nocombreloc
1153Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1154
b8871f35
L
1155@item nocommon
1156Generate common symbols with the STT_OBJECT type druing a relocatable
1157link.
1158
cd6d6c15 1159@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1160Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1161defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1162
1163@item nodefaultlib
1164Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1165ignore any default library search paths.
1166
1167@item nodelete
1168Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1169
1170@item nodlopen
1171Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1172
1173@item nodump
1174Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1175
6aa29e7b
JJ
1176@item noexecstack
1177Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1178
8dfef1bd
L
1179@item text
1180Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1181
1182@item notext
1183Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1184
1185@item textoff
1186Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1187
6aa29e7b
JJ
1188@item norelro
1189Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1190
cd6d6c15
NC
1191@item now
1192When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1193dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1194when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1195deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1196first called.
1197
1198@item origin
1199Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1200
6aa29e7b
JJ
1201@item relro
1202Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1203
24718e3b
L
1204@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1205Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1206
1207@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1208Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1209
04c3a755
NS
1210@item stack-size=@var{value}
1211Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1212Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1213@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1214
d258b828
IZ
1215@item bndplt
1216Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1217
889c2a67
L
1218@item noextern-protected-data
1219Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1220library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1221to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1222generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1223module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1224i386 and x86-64.
1225
aec6b87e
L
1226@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1227Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1228This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1229dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1230Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1231
4c10bbaa
L
1232@item noreloc-overflow
1233Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1234relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1235overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1236
caa65211
L
1237@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1238@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1239@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1240@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1241@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1242Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1243to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1244@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1245@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1246@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1247@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1248@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1249Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1250
cd6d6c15
NC
1251@end table
1252
ece2d90e 1253Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1254
1255@kindex -(
1256@cindex groups of archives
1257@item -( @var{archives} -)
1258@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1259The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1260either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1261
1262The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1263references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1264the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1265archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1266object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1267would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1268they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1269resolved.
1270
1271Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1272it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1273more archives.
1274
69da35b5
NC
1275@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1276@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1277@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1278@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1279Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1280recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1281and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1282the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1283behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1284so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1285restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1286
4a43e768
AM
1287@kindex --as-needed
1288@kindex --no-as-needed
1289@item --as-needed
1290@itemx --no-as-needed
1291This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1292on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1293the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1294on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1295needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1296emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1297non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1298the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1299non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1300Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1301the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1302needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1303from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1304
e56f61be
L
1305@kindex --add-needed
1306@kindex --no-add-needed
1307@item --add-needed
1308@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1309These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1310their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1311options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1312and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1313
252b5132
RH
1314@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1315@item -assert @var{keyword}
1316This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1317
1318@kindex -Bdynamic
1319@kindex -dy
1320@kindex -call_shared
1321@item -Bdynamic
1322@itemx -dy
1323@itemx -call_shared
1324Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1325for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1326default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1327for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1328multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1329@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1330
a1ab1d2a
UD
1331@kindex -Bgroup
1332@item -Bgroup
1333Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1334section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1335object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1336@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1337only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1338
252b5132
RH
1339@kindex -Bstatic
1340@kindex -dn
1341@kindex -non_shared
1342@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1343@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1344@itemx -dn
1345@itemx -non_shared
1346@itemx -static
1347Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1348platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1349variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1350may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1351library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1352option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1353option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1354shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1355references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1356libraries.
252b5132
RH
1357
1358@kindex -Bsymbolic
1359@item -Bsymbolic
1360When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1361definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1362for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1363within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1364@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1365executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1366the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1367support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1368
40b36307
L
1369@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1370@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1371When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1372symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1373This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1374when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1375to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1376This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1377libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1378
55255dae
L
1379@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1380@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1381Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1382typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1383global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1384within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1385to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1386in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1387which support shared libraries.
1388
1389The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1390scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1391
40b36307
L
1392@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1393@item --dynamic-list-data
1394Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1395
1396@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1397@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1398Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1399is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1400
0b8a70d9
L
1401@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1402@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1403Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1404
252b5132
RH
1405@kindex --check-sections
1406@kindex --no-check-sections
1407@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1408@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1409Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1410been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1411perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1412suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1413allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1414restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1415Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1416force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1417option.
252b5132 1418
ddbb8a31
NC
1419@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1420@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1421@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1422@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1423This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1424by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1425command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1426output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1427input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1428specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1429follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1430behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1431
1432This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1433libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1434mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1435their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1436required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1437the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1438dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1439symbols.
1440
252b5132
RH
1441@cindex cross reference table
1442@kindex --cref
1443@item --cref
1444Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1445generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1446Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1447
1448The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1449easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1450sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1451symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1452definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1453where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1454symbol are listed.
252b5132 1455
4818e05f
AM
1456@cindex common allocation
1457@kindex --no-define-common
1458@item --no-define-common
1459This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1460The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1461@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1462
1463The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1464the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1465of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1466forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1467Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1468from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1469This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1470and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1471duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1472paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1473
252b5132 1474@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1475@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1476@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1477Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1478address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1479times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1480limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1481context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1482symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1483constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1484using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1485@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1486equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1487
1488@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1489@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1490@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1491@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1492@itemx --no-demangle
1493These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1494and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1495present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1496underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1497mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1498different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1499to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1500demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1501is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1502
1503@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1504@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1505@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1506@item -I@var{file}
1507@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1508Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1509generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1510linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1511doing.
1512
9b8b325a
RF
1513@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1514@item --no-dynamic-linker
1515When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1516linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1517executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1518entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1519
7ce691ae 1520@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1521@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1522@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1523@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1524Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1525with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1526
252b5132
RH
1527@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1528@item --force-exe-suffix
1529Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1530
1531If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1532@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1533the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1534option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1535Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1536it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1537
1538@kindex --gc-sections
1539@kindex --no-gc-sections
1540@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1541@item --gc-sections
1542@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1543Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1544targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1545performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1546@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1547collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1548implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1549
d5465ba2
AM
1550@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1551examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1552symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1553command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1554referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1555libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1556referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1557the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1558relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1559
ac69cbc6 1560This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1561@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1562specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1563a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1564
c17d87de
NC
1565@kindex --print-gc-sections
1566@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1567@cindex garbage collection
1568@item --print-gc-sections
1569@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1570List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1571printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1572collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1573default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1574be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1575line.
1576
22185505 1577@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1578@cindex garbage collection
1579@item --gc-keep-exported
1580When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1581collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1582default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1583executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1584collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1585Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1586it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1587ELF format targets.
1588
30824704
RM
1589@kindex --print-output-format
1590@cindex output format
1591@item --print-output-format
1592Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1593other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1594in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1595
3604cb1f
TG
1596@kindex --print-memory-usage
1597@cindex memory usage
1598@item --print-memory-usage
1599Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1600the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1601quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1602headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1603parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1604
1605@smallexample
1606Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1607 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1608 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1609@end smallexample
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@cindex help
1612@cindex usage
1613@kindex --help
1614@item --help
1615Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1616
ea20a7da
CC
1617@kindex --target-help
1618@item --target-help
1619Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1620
2509a395
SL
1621@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1622@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1623Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1624@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1625
1626@cindex memory usage
1627@kindex --no-keep-memory
1628@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1629@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1630symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1631instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1632necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1633while linking a large executable.
1634
1635@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1636@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1637@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1638@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1639Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1640is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1641The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1642behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1643libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1644
aa713662
L
1645@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1646@kindex -z muldefs
1647@item --allow-multiple-definition
1648@itemx -z muldefs
1649Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1650report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1651first definition will be used.
1652
b79e8c78 1653@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1654@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1655@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1656@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1657Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1658This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1659determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1660shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1661how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1662
903249d7
NC
1663The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1664referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1665an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1666a shared library.
1667
1668The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1669libraries specified at link time are that:
1670
1671@itemize @bullet
1672@item
1673A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1674that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1675resolvable at load time.
1676@item
1677There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1678symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1679
1680The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1681select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1682architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1683appropriate memset function.
1684@end itemize
b79e8c78 1685
31941635
L
1686@kindex --no-undefined-version
1687@item --no-undefined-version
1688Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1689it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1690will be issued instead.
1691
3e3b46e5
PB
1692@kindex --default-symver
1693@item --default-symver
1694Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1695exported symbols.
1696
1697@kindex --default-imported-symver
1698@item --default-imported-symver
1699Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1700imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1701
252b5132
RH
1702@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1703@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1704Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1705files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1706been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1707This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1708errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1709have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1710inappropriate.
1711
fe7929ce
AM
1712@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1713@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1714Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1715library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1716
252b5132
RH
1717@kindex --no-whole-archive
1718@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1719Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1720archive files.
1721
1722@cindex output file after errors
1723@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1724@item --noinhibit-exec
1725Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1726Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1727errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1728when it issues any error whatsoever.
1729
0a9c1c8e
CD
1730@kindex -nostdlib
1731@item -nostdlib
1732Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1733command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1734(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1735
252b5132 1736@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1737@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1738@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1739@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1740file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1741@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1742object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1743object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1744should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1745usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1746name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1747list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1748command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1749this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1750@end ifclear
1751
76359541
TP
1752@kindex --out-implib
1753@item --out-implib @var{file}
1754Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1755the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1756library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1757may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1758behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1759step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1760the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1761
36af4a4e
JJ
1762@kindex -pie
1763@kindex --pic-executable
1764@item -pie
1765@itemx --pic-executable
1766@cindex position independent executables
1767Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1768ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1769libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1770address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1771normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1772defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1773
252b5132
RH
1774@kindex -qmagic
1775@item -qmagic
1776This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1777
1778@kindex -Qy
1779@item -Qy
1780This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1781
1782@kindex --relax
1783@cindex synthesizing linker
1784@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1785@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1786@item --relax
28d5f677 1787@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1788An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1789@ifset GENERIC
1790This option is only supported on a few targets.
1791@end ifset
1792@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1793@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1794@end ifset
1795@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1796@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1797@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1798@ifset XTENSA
1799@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1800@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1801@ifset M68HC11
1802@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1803@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1804@ifset NIOSII
1805@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1806@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1807@ifset POWERPC
1808@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1809@end ifset
252b5132 1810
28d5f677
NC
1811On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1812global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1813addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1814synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1815instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1816
1817On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1818debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1819@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1820This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1821family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1822@end ifset
1823
1824@ifset GENERIC
1825On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1826but ignored.
1827@end ifset
1828
28d5f677
NC
1829On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1830@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1831
252b5132
RH
1832@cindex retaining specified symbols
1833@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1834@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1835@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1836@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1837Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1838discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1839symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1840@ifset GENERIC
1841(such as VxWorks)
1842@end ifset
1843where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1844run-time memory.
1845
1846@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1847or symbols needed for relocations.
1848
1849You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1850line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1851
1852@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1853@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1854@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1855@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1856Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1857linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1858arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1859them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1860also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1861objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1862@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1863ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1864@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1865
ff5dcc92 1866The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1867SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1868@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1869runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1870options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1871gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1872file systems.
252b5132 1873
ff5dcc92 1874For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1875followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1876the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1877@end ifset
1878
1879@ifset GENERIC
1880@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1881@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1882@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1883When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1884happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1885of the input files.
1886
1887When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1888non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1889shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1890explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1891specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1892@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1893either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1894appearing multiple times.
1895
e680a6b6
NC
1896The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1897directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1898containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1899and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
190064-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1901
1902The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1903@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1904supported.
1905
28c309a2
NC
1906This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1907that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1908is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1909runtime linker would do.
1910
252b5132 1911The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1912libraries:
252b5132
RH
1913@enumerate
1914@item
ff5dcc92 1915Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1916@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1917Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1918between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1919specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1920used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1921at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1922by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1923the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1924@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1925On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1926@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1927environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1928@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1929On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1930directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1931@item
a1b8d843 1932For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1933variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1934@item
ec4eb78a
L
1935For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1936@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1937libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1938@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1939@item
252b5132
RH
1940The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1941@item
1942For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1943exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1944@end enumerate
1945
1946If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1947warning and continue with the link.
1948@end ifset
1949
1950@kindex -shared
1951@kindex -Bshareable
1952@item -shared
1953@itemx -Bshareable
1954@cindex shared libraries
1955Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1956and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1957shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1958undefined symbols in the link.
1959
252b5132 1960@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1961@item --sort-common
1962@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1963@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1964This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1965ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1966sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1967eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1968between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1969specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1970
2509a395
SL
1971@kindex --sort-section=name
1972@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1973This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1974patterns in the linker script.
1975
2509a395
SL
1976@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1977@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1978This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1979patterns in the linker script.
1980
252b5132 1981@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1982@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1983Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1984each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1985size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1986
1987@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1988@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1989Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1990output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1991This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1992certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1993cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1994that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1995support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1996input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1997more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1998many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1999
2000@kindex --stats
2001@item --stats
2002Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2003as execution time and memory usage.
2004
2509a395 2005@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2006@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2007Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2008configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2009that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2010
252b5132
RH
2011@kindex --traditional-format
2012@cindex traditional format
2013@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2014For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2015the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2016use the traditional format instead.
2017
2018@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2019For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2020symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2021full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2022@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2023trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2024combine duplicate entries.
2025
2509a395
SL
2026@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2027@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2028Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2029address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2030times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2031line.
2032@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2033for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2034@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2035should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2036sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2037
2509a395
SL
2038@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2039@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2040@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2041@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2042@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2043@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2044@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2045Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2046@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2047
2509a395
SL
2048@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2049@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2050@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2051When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2052byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2053
9d5777a3
RM
2054@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2055@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2056@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2057When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2058the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2059text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2060
0d705e9f
AM
2061@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2062@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2063@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2064When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2065model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2066
560e09e9
NC
2067@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2068@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2069Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2070values for @samp{method}:
2071
2072@table @samp
2073@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2074Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2075
2076@item report-all
da8bce14 2077Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2078
2079@item ignore-in-object-files
2080Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2081ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2082
2083@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2084Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2085ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2086when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2087libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2088command line.
2089@end table
2090
2091The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2092by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2093
2094Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2095unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2096can change this to a warning.
2097
1715a13c
L
2098@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2099@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2100@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2101@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2102Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2103supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2104the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2105argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2106
2107@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2108@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2109@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2110Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2111used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2112about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2113is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2114see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2115use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2116symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2117@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2118
7ce691ae 2119@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2120@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2121@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2122@item --warn-common
2123Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2124a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2125but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2126you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2127Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2128warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2129
2130There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2131
2132@table @samp
2133@item int i = 1;
2134A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2135file.
2136
2137@item extern int i;
2138An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2139There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2140variable somewhere.
2141
2142@item int i;
2143A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2144variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2145The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2146single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2147size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2148a definition of the same variable.
2149@end table
2150
2151The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2152Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2153just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2154encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2155a common symbol.
2156
2157@enumerate
2158@item
2159Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2160definition for the symbol.
2161@smallexample
2162@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2163 overridden by definition
2164@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2165@end smallexample
2166
2167@item
2168Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2169the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2170except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2171@smallexample
2172@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2173 overriding common
2174@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2175@end smallexample
2176
2177@item
2178Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2179@smallexample
2180@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2181 of `@var{symbol}'
2182@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2183@end smallexample
2184
2185@item
2186Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2187@smallexample
2188@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2189 overridden by larger common
2190@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2191@end smallexample
2192
2193@item
2194Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2195the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2196encountered in a different order.
2197@smallexample
2198@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2199 overriding smaller common
2200@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2201@end smallexample
2202@end enumerate
2203
2204@kindex --warn-constructors
2205@item --warn-constructors
2206Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2207object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2208detect the use of global constructors.
2209
2210@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2211@item --warn-multiple-gp
2212Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2213This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2214Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2215section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2216of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2217base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2218base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2219bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2220large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2221values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2222option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2223
2224@kindex --warn-once
2225@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2226@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2227@item --warn-once
2228Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2229which refers to it.
2230
2231@kindex --warn-section-align
2232@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2233@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2234@item --warn-section-align
2235Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2236alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2237The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2238is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2239the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2240
8fdd7217
NC
2241@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2242@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2243Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2244
a0c402a5
L
2245@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2246@item --warn-alternate-em
2247Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2248
560e09e9
NC
2249@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2250@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2251If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2252@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2253This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2254
2255@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2256@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2257This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2258it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2259
252b5132
RH
2260@kindex --whole-archive
2261@cindex including an entire archive
2262@item --whole-archive
2263For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2264@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2265in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2266files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2267library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2268library. This option may be used more than once.
2269
7ec229ce 2270Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2271about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2272Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2273list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2274your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2275
2509a395
SL
2276@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2277@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2278Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2279@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2280undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2281@var{symbol}.
2282
2283This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2284wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2285wishes to call the system function, it should call
2286@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2287
2288Here is a trivial example:
2289
2290@smallexample
2291void *
cc2f008e 2292__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2293@{
cc2f008e 2294 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2295 return __real_malloc (c);
2296@}
2297@end smallexample
2298
ff5dcc92 2299If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2300all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2301instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2302call the real @code{malloc} function.
2303
2304You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2305links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2306you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2307file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2308call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2309
6aa29e7b 2310@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2311@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2312@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2313@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2314Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2315(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2316section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2317
e41b3a13
JJ
2318@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2319@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2320Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2321generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2322if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2323
6c1439be
L
2324@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2325@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2326@item --enable-new-dtags
2327@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2328This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2329systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2330@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2331and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2332If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2333created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2334those options are only available for ELF systems.
2335
2d643429 2336@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2337@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2338Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2339close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2340time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2341increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2342value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2343
fdc90cb4
JJ
2344@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2345@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2346Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2347@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2348new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2349the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2350hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2351
0ce398f1
L
2352@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2353@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2354@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2355@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2356@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2357@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2358@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2359@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2360On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2361compressed using zlib.
2362
2363@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2364sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2365DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2366instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2367also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2368sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2369
2370The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2371@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2372
2373Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2374sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2375for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2376uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2377
2378The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2379involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2380default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2381@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2382
35835446
JR
2383@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2384@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2385This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2386linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2387for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2388about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2389
4f9c04f7 2390Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23911021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2392run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2393has been used.
2394
2395The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2396enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2397
c0065db7
RM
2398@kindex --build-id
2399@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2400@item --build-id
2401@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2402Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2403or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2404unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2405@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2406@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2407@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2408the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2409string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2410@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2411is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2412
2413The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2414that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2415unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2416to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2417file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2418string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2419
2420Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2421@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2422@end table
2423
0285c67d
NC
2424@c man end
2425
36f63dca 2426@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2427
0285c67d
NC
2428@c man begin OPTIONS
2429
ff5dcc92 2430The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2431the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2432normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2433use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2434@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2435like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2436symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2437object file).
2438
2439In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2440support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2441PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2442values by either a space or an equals sign.
2443
ff5dcc92 2444@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2445
2446@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2447@item --add-stdcall-alias
2448If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2449as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2450[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2451
2452@kindex --base-file
2453@item --base-file @var{file}
2454Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2455addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2456@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2457[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2458
2459@kindex --dll
2460@item --dll
2461Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2462@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2463file.
bb10df36 2464[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2465
88183869
DK
2466@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2467@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2468@item --enable-long-section-names
2469@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2470The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2471the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2472for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2473fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2474to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2475allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2476disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2477generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2478as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2479with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2480GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2481information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2482option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2483section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2484when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2485image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2486[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2487
252b5132
RH
2488@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2489@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2490@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2491@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2492If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2493do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2494only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2495resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2496undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2497@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2498to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2499warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2500import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2501to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2502feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2503@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2504mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2505[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2506
522f09cd
KT
2507@kindex --leading-underscore
2508@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2509@item --leading-underscore
2510@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2511For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2512in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2513disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2514
252b5132
RH
2515@cindex DLLs, creating
2516@kindex --export-all-symbols
2517@item --export-all-symbols
2518If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2519be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2520otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2521explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2522attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2523option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2524@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2525@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2526exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2527re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2528such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2529@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2530@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2531Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2532not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2533extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2534(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2535These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2536@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2537@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2538@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2539@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2540[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2541
2542@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2543@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2544Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2545exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2546[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2547
2927aaca
NC
2548@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2549@item --exclude-all-symbols
2550Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2551[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2552
252b5132
RH
2553@kindex --file-alignment
2554@item --file-alignment
2555Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2556file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2557512.
bb10df36 2558[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2559
2560@cindex heap size
2561@kindex --heap
2562@item --heap @var{reserve}
2563@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2564Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2565to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2566committed.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2568
2569@cindex image base
2570@kindex --image-base
2571@item --image-base @var{value}
2572Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2573the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2574is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2575your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2576other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2577for dlls.
bb10df36 2578[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2579
2580@kindex --kill-at
2581@item --kill-at
2582If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2583symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2584[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2585
26d2d8a2
BF
2586@kindex --large-address-aware
2587@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2588If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2589header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2590greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2591or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2592section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2593[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2594
f69a2f97
NC
2595@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2596@item --disable-large-address-aware
2597Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2598This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2599driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2600addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2601[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2602
252b5132
RH
2603@kindex --major-image-version
2604@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2605Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2606[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2607
2608@kindex --major-os-version
2609@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2610Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2611[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2612
2613@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2614@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2615Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2616[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2617
2618@kindex --minor-image-version
2619@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2620Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2621[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2622
2623@kindex --minor-os-version
2624@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2625Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2626[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2627
2628@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2629@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2630Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2631[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2632
2633@cindex DEF files, creating
2634@cindex DLLs, creating
2635@kindex --output-def
2636@item --output-def @var{file}
2637The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2638file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2639(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2640library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2641automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2642[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2643
b044cda1 2644@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2645@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2646@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2647@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2648Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2649@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2650By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2651for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2652execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2653[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2654
2655@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2656@item --disable-auto-image-base
2657Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2658user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2659default.
bb10df36 2660[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2661
2662@cindex DLLs, linking to
2663@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2664@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2665When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2666search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2667@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2668between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2669uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2670@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2671[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2672
2673@kindex --enable-auto-import
2674@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2675Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2676DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2677building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2678'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2679to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2680specification published by Microsoft.
2681
e2a83dd0
NC
2682Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2683data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2684placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2685around a problem with consts that is described here:
2686http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2687
4d8907ac
DS
2688Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2689see this message:
0d888aac 2690
ece2d90e 2691"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2692documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2693
ece2d90e
NC
2694This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2695ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2696allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2697fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2698constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2699multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2700this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2701of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2702the warning, and exit.
2703
2704There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2705data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2706
2fa9fc65
NC
2707One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2708of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2709this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2710
c0065db7
RM
2711A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2712that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2713there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2714a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2715
2716@example
2717extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2718extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2719 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2720@end example
2721
2722or
2723
2724@example
2725extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2726extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2727 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2728@end example
2729
c0065db7 2730For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2731is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2732
2733@example
2734extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2735extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2736 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2737@end example
2738
c406afaf
NC
2739or
2740
2741@example
2742extern long long extern_ll;
2743extern_ll -->
2744 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2745@end example
2746
2fa9fc65 2747A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2748'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2749@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2750requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2751building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2752merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2753between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2754constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2755
2756Original:
2757@example
2758--foo.h
2759extern int arr[];
2760--foo.c
2761#include "foo.h"
2762void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2763 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2764@}
2765@end example
2766
2767Solution 1:
2768@example
2769--foo.h
2770extern int arr[];
2771--foo.c
2772#include "foo.h"
2773void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2774 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2775 volatile int *parr = arr;
2776 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2777@}
2778@end example
2779
2780Solution 2:
2781@example
2782--foo.h
2783/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2784#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2785 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2786#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2787#else
2788#define FOO_IMPORT
2789#endif
2790extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2791--foo.c
2792#include "foo.h"
2793void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2794 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2795@}
2796@end example
2797
c0065db7 2798A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2799library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2800for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2801functions).
bb10df36 2802[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2803
2804@kindex --disable-auto-import
2805@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2806Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2807@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2808[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2809
2fa9fc65
NC
2810@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2811@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2812If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2813that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2814a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2815environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2816[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2817
2818@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2819@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2820Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2821DLLs.
bb10df36 2822[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2823
b044cda1
CW
2824@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2825@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2826Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2827[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2828
252b5132
RH
2829@kindex --section-alignment
2830@item --section-alignment
2831Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2832addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2833[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2834
2835@cindex stack size
2836@kindex --stack
2837@item --stack @var{reserve}
2838@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2839Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2840to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2841committed.
bb10df36 2842[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2843
2844@kindex --subsystem
2845@item --subsystem @var{which}
2846@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2847@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2848Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2849legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2850@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2851the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2852@var{which}.
bb10df36 2853[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2854
2f563b51
DK
2855The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2856of the PE file header:
2857[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2858
2d5c3743
NC
2859@kindex --high-entropy-va
2860@item --high-entropy-va
2861Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2862(ASLR).
2863
2f563b51
DK
2864@kindex --dynamicbase
2865@item --dynamicbase
2866The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2867randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2868Vista for i386 PE targets.
2869
2870@kindex --forceinteg
2871@item --forceinteg
2872Code integrity checks are enforced.
2873
2874@kindex --nxcompat
2875@item --nxcompat
2876The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2877This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2878
2879@kindex --no-isolation
2880@item --no-isolation
2881Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2882
2883@kindex --no-seh
2884@item --no-seh
2885The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2886this image.
2887
2888@kindex --no-bind
2889@item --no-bind
2890Do not bind this image.
2891
2892@kindex --wdmdriver
2893@item --wdmdriver
2894The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2895
2f563b51
DK
2896@kindex --tsaware
2897@item --tsaware
2898The image is Terminal Server aware.
2899
0cb112f7
CF
2900@kindex --insert-timestamp
2901@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2902@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2903Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2904as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2905other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2906will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2907same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2908can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2909that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2910identically.
252b5132
RH
2911@end table
2912
0285c67d
NC
2913@c man end
2914
ac145307
BS
2915@ifset C6X
2916@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2917
2918@c man begin OPTIONS
2919
2920The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2921libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2922all executables use an index of 0.
2923
2924@table @gcctabopt
2925
2926@kindex --dsbt-size
2927@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2928This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2929or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2930entries.
2931
2932@kindex --dsbt-index
2933@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2934This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2935to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2936executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2937@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2938
fbd9ad90
PB
2939@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2940The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2941exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2942
ac145307
BS
2943@end table
2944
2945@c man end
2946@end ifset
2947
93fd0973
SC
2948@ifset M68HC11
2949@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2950
2951@c man begin OPTIONS
2952
2953The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2954memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2955
2956@table @gcctabopt
2957
2958@kindex --no-trampoline
2959@item --no-trampoline
2960This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2961is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2962instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2963
2964@kindex --bank-window
2965@item --bank-window @var{name}
2966This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2967the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2968The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2969paging and addresses within the memory window.
2970
2971@end table
2972
2973@c man end
2974@end ifset
2975
7fb9f789
NC
2976@ifset M68K
2977@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2978
2979@c man begin OPTIONS
2980
2981The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2982when linking for 68K targets.
2983
2984@table @gcctabopt
2985
2986@kindex --got
2987@item --got=@var{type}
2988This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2989@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2990@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2991Info entry for @file{ld}.
2992
2993@end table
2994
2995@c man end
2996@end ifset
2997
833794fc
MR
2998@ifset MIPS
2999@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3000
3001@c man begin OPTIONS
3002
3003The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3004generation when linking for MIPS targets.
3005
3006@table @gcctabopt
3007
3008@kindex --insn32
3009@item --insn32
3010@kindex --no-insn32
3011@itemx --no-insn32
3012These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3013generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3014or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
301532-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3016used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3017possible.
3018
3019@end table
3020
3021@c man end
3022@end ifset
3023
252b5132
RH
3024@ifset UsesEnvVars
3025@node Environment
3026@section Environment Variables
3027
0285c67d
NC
3028@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3029
560e09e9 3030You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3031@ifclear SingleFormat
3032@code{GNUTARGET},
3033@end ifclear
3034@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3035
36f63dca 3036@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3037@kindex GNUTARGET
3038@cindex default input format
3039@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3040use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3041of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3042@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3043of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3044attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3045this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3046there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3047object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3048BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3049in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3050@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3051
3052@kindex LDEMULATION
3053@cindex default emulation
3054@cindex emulation, default
3055@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3056@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3057behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3058available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3059the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3060variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3061linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3062
3063@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3064@cindex demangling, default
3065Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3066@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3067default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3068a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3069may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3070options.
3071
0285c67d
NC
3072@c man end
3073@end ifset
3074
252b5132
RH
3075@node Scripts
3076@chapter Linker Scripts
3077
3078@cindex scripts
3079@cindex linker scripts
3080@cindex command files
3081Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3082written in the linker command language.
3083
3084The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3085the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3086the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3087more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3088direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3089described below.
3090
3091The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3092yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3093linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3094to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3095such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3096
3097You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3098line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3099default linker script.
3100
3101You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3102to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3103Linker Scripts}.
3104
3105@menu
3106* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3107* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3108* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3109* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3110* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3111* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3112* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3113* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3114* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3115* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3116* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3117@end menu
3118
3119@node Basic Script Concepts
3120@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3121@cindex linker script concepts
3122We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3123describe the linker script language.
3124
3125The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3126file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3127@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3128The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3129purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3130among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3131section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3132in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3133
3134Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3135also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3136contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3137the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3138A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3139area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3140loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3141which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3142of debugging information.
3143
3144Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3145first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3146the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3147@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3148section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3149same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3150is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3151(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3152based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3153RAM address would be the VMA.
3154
3155You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3156program with the @samp{-h} option.
3157
3158Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3159@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3160has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3161information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3162will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3163static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3164referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3165
3166You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3167program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3168option.
3169
3170@node Script Format
3171@section Linker Script Format
3172@cindex linker script format
3173Linker scripts are text files.
3174
3175You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3176either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3177symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3178generally ignored.
3179
3180Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3181If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3182otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3183double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3184file name.
3185
3186You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3187@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3188to whitespace.
3189
3190@node Simple Example
3191@section Simple Linker Script Example
3192@cindex linker script example
3193@cindex example of linker script
3194Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3195
3196The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3197@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3198memory layout of the output file.
3199
3200The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3201describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3202code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3203@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3204Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3205your input files.
3206
3207For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
32080x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3209linker script which will do that:
3210@smallexample
3211SECTIONS
3212@{
3213 . = 0x10000;
3214 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3215 . = 0x8000000;
3216 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3217 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3218@}
3219@end smallexample
3220
3221You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3222followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3223descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3224
252b5132
RH
3225The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3226sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3227counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3228other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3229current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3230incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3231@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3232
3233The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3234required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3235after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3236which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3237wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3238means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3239
3240Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3241@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3242@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3243
3244The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3245the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3246at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3247output section, the value of the location counter will be
3248@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3249effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3250immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3251
3252The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3253alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3254example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3255sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3256may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3257sections.
3258
3259That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3260
3261@node Simple Commands
3262@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3263@cindex linker script simple commands
3264In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3265
3266@menu
3267* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3268* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3269@ifclear SingleFormat
3270* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3271@end ifclear
3272
4a93e180 3273* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3274* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3275@end menu
3276
3277@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3278@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3279@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3280@cindex start of execution
3281@cindex first instruction
3282@cindex entry point
3283The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3284point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3285entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3286@smallexample
3287ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3288@end smallexample
3289
3290There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3291entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3292stopping when one of them succeeds:
3293@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3294@item
252b5132 3295the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3296@item
252b5132 3297the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3298@item
3ab904c4
NC
3299the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3300targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3301check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3302@item
252b5132 3303the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3304@item
252b5132
RH
3305The address @code{0}.
3306@end itemize
3307
3308@node File Commands
36f63dca 3309@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3310@cindex linker script file commands
3311Several linker script commands deal with files.
3312
3313@table @code
3314@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3315@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3316@cindex including a linker script
3317Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3318be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3319with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
332010 levels deep.
3321
4006703d
NS
3322You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3323@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3324
252b5132
RH
3325@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3326@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3327@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3328@cindex input files in linker scripts
3329@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3330@cindex linker script input object files
3331The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3332in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3333
3334For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3335a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3336then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3337
3338In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3339script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3340
e3f2db7f
AO
3341In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3342with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3343located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3344for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3345open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3346linker will search through the archive library search path.
3347The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3348as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3349description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3350
ff5dcc92 3351If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3352name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3353@samp{-l}.
3354
3355When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3356files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3357script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3358
3359@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3360@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3361@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3362@cindex grouping input files
3363The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3364files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3365new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3366in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3367
b717d30e
JJ
3368@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3369@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3370@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3371This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3372commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3373as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3374with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3375when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3376@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3377and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3378setting afterwards.
3379
252b5132
RH
3380@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3381@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3382@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3383The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3384@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3385@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3386Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3387precedence.
3388
3389You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3390output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3391
3392@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3393@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3394@cindex library search path in linker script
3395@cindex archive search path in linker script
3396@cindex search path in linker script
3397The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3398@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3399@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3400on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3401are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3402the command line option are searched first.
3403
3404@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3405@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3406@cindex first input file
3407The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3408that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3409though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3410when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3411first file.
3412@end table
3413
3414@ifclear SingleFormat
3415@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3416@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3417A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3418
3419@table @code
3420@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3421@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3422@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3423@cindex output file format in linker script
3424The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3425output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3426exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3427(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3428line option takes precedence.
3429
3430You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3431formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3432This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3433desired endianness.
3434
3435If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3436will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3437output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3438used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3439
3440For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3441command:
3442@smallexample
3443OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3444@end smallexample
3445This says that the default format for the output file is
3446@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3447option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3448format.
3449
3450@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3451@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3452@cindex input file format in linker script
3453The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3454files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3455This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3456(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3457is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3458command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3459@end table
3460@end ifclear
3461
4a93e180
NC
3462@node REGION_ALIAS
3463@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3464@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3465@cindex region alias
3466@cindex region names
3467
3468Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3469@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3470
3471@smallexample
3472REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3473@end smallexample
3474
3475The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3476memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3477to memory regions. An example follows.
3478
3479Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3480memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3481that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3482non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3483access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3484read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3485sections:
3486
3487@itemize @bullet
3488@item
3489@code{.text} program code;
3490@item
3491@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3492@item
3493@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3494@item
3495@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3496@end itemize
3497
3498The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3499part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3500output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3501systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3502@code{C}:
3503@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3504@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3505@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3506@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3507@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3508@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3509@end multitable
3510The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3511loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3512the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3513the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3514
3515The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3516includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3517memory layout:
3518@smallexample
3519INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3520
3521SECTIONS
3522 @{
3523 .text :
3524 @{
3525 *(.text)
3526 @} > REGION_TEXT
3527 .rodata :
3528 @{
3529 *(.rodata)
3530 rodata_end = .;
3531 @} > REGION_RODATA
3532 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3533 @{
3534 data_start = .;
3535 *(.data)
3536 @} > REGION_DATA
3537 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3538 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3539 .bss :
3540 @{
3541 *(.bss)
3542 @} > REGION_BSS
3543 @}
3544@end smallexample
3545
3546Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3547regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3548variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3549@table @code
3550@item A
3551Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3552@smallexample
3553MEMORY
3554 @{
3555 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3556 @}
3557
3558REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3559REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3560REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3561REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3562@end smallexample
3563@item B
3564Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3565into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3566@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3567@smallexample
3568MEMORY
3569 @{
3570 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3571 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3572 @}
3573
3574REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3575REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3576REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3577REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3578@end smallexample
3579@item C
3580Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3581@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3582initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3583system start into the @code{RAM}.
3584@smallexample
3585MEMORY
3586 @{
3587 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3588 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3589 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3590 @}
3591
3592REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3593REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3594REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3595REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3596@end smallexample
3597@end table
3598
3599It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3600@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3601necessary:
3602@smallexample
3603#include <string.h>
3604
3605extern char data_start [];
3606extern char data_size [];
3607extern char data_load_start [];
3608
3609void copy_data(void)
3610@{
3611 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3612 @{
3613 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3614 @}
3615@}
3616@end smallexample
3617
252b5132 3618@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3619@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3620There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3621
3622@table @code
3623@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3624@kindex ASSERT
3625@cindex assertion in linker script
3626Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3627with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3628
fd1c4238
NC
3629Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3630take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3631inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3632for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3633symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3634
3635@smallexample
3636 .stack :
3637 @{
3638 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3639 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3640 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3641 @}
3642@end smallexample
3643
3644will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3645PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3646can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3647
3648@smallexample
3649 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3650 .stack :
3651 @{
3652 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3653 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3654 @}
3655@end smallexample
3656
3657will work.
3658
252b5132
RH
3659@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3660@kindex EXTERN
3661@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3662Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3663symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3664modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3665each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3666command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3667
3668@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3669@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3670@cindex common allocation in linker script
3671This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3672to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3673output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3674
4818e05f
AM
3675@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3676@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3677@cindex common allocation in linker script
3678This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3679command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3680to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3681
53d25da6
AM
3682@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3683@kindex INSERT
3684@cindex insert user script into default script
3685This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3686augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3687inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3688@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3689default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3690sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3691linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3692insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3693linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3694default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3695of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3696to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3697is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3698
3699@smallexample
3700SECTIONS
3701@{
3702 OVERLAY :
3703 @{
3704 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3705 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3706 @}
3707@}
3708INSERT AFTER .text;
3709@end smallexample
3710
252b5132
RH
3711@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3712@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3713@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3714This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3715references among certain output sections.
3716
3717In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3718using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3719will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3720errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3721a function defined in the other section.
3722
3723The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3724@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3725an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3726@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3727names.
3728
cdf96953
MF
3729@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3730@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3731@cindex cross references
3732This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3733references to one section from a list of other sections.
3734
3735The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3736output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3737a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3738there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3739must never call back.
3740
3741The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3742The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3743If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3744the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3745status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3746names, not input section names.
3747
252b5132
RH
3748@ifclear SingleFormat
3749@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3750@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3751@cindex machine architecture
3752@cindex architecture
3753Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3754of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3755architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3756the @samp{-f} option.
3757@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3758
3759@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3760@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3761This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3762@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3763in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3764@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3765@end table
3766
3767@node Assignments
3768@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3769@cindex assignment in scripts
3770@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3771@cindex variables, defining
3772You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3773the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3774
3775@menu
3776* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3777* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3778* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3779* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3780* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3781@end menu
3782
3783@node Simple Assignments
3784@subsection Simple Assignments
3785
3786You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3787
3788@table @code
3789@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3790@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3791@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3792@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3793@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3794@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3795@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3796@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3797@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3798@end table
3799
3800The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3801@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3802defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3803
3804The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3805may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3806
3807The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3808
3809Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3810
3811You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3812statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3813section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3814
3815The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3816expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3817
3818Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3819assignments may be used:
3820
3821@smallexample
3822floating_point = 0;
3823SECTIONS
3824@{
3825 .text :
3826 @{
3827 *(.text)
3828 _etext = .;
3829 @}
156e34dd 3830 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3831 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3832@}
3833@end smallexample
3834@noindent
3835In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3836zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3837the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3838defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3839upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3840
eb8476a6
MR
3841@node HIDDEN
3842@subsection HIDDEN
3843@cindex HIDDEN
3844For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3845exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3846
3847Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3848@code{HIDDEN}:
3849
3850@smallexample
3851HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3852SECTIONS
3853@{
3854 .text :
3855 @{
3856 *(.text)
3857 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3858 @}
3859 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3860 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3861@}
3862@end smallexample
3863@noindent
3864In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3865
252b5132
RH
3866@node PROVIDE
3867@subsection PROVIDE
3868@cindex PROVIDE
3869In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3870only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3871the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3872@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3873@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3874@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3875@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3876@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3877
3878Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3879@smallexample
3880SECTIONS
3881@{
3882 .text :
3883 @{
3884 *(.text)
3885 _etext = .;
3886 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3887 @}
3888@}
3889@end smallexample
3890
3891In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3892underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3893the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3894underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3895If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3896linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3897
7af8e998
L
3898@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3899@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3900@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3901Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3902hidden and won't be exported.
3903
73ae6183
NC
3904@node Source Code Reference
3905@subsection Source Code Reference
3906
3907Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3908intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3909a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3910symbol that does not have a value.
3911
3912Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3913transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3914stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3915prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3916mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3917of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3918variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3919linker script variable might be referred to as:
3920
3921@smallexample
3922 extern int foo;
3923@end smallexample
3924
3925But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3926
3927@smallexample
3928 _foo = 1000;
3929@end smallexample
3930
3931In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3932transformation has taken place.
3933
3934When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3935things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3936in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3937second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3938table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3939contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3940value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3941
3942@smallexample
3943 int foo = 1000;
3944@end smallexample
3945
10bf6894 3946creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3947holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3948number 1000 is initially stored.
3949
3950When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3951first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3952memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3953So:
3954
3955@smallexample
3956 foo = 1;
3957@end smallexample
3958
3959looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3960associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3961address. Whereas:
3962
3963@smallexample
3964 int * a = & foo;
3965@end smallexample
3966
10bf6894 3967looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3968and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3969the variable @samp{a}.
3970
3971Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3972the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3973an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3974
3975@smallexample
3976 foo = 1000;
3977@end smallexample
3978
3979creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3980the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3981address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3982linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3983access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3984
3985Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3986you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3987use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3988section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3989linker script contains these declarations:
3990
3991@smallexample
3992@group
3993 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3994 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3995 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3996@end group
3997@end smallexample
3998
3999Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4000
4001@smallexample
4002@group
4003 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4004
73ae6183
NC
4005 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4006@end group
4007@end smallexample
4008
4009Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4010Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4011arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4012
4013@smallexample
4014@group
4015 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4016
4017 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4018@end group
4019@end smallexample
4020
4021Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4022operators.
73ae6183 4023
252b5132 4024@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4025@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4026@kindex SECTIONS
4027The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4028into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4029
4030The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4031@smallexample
4032SECTIONS
4033@{
4034 @var{sections-command}
4035 @var{sections-command}
4036 @dots{}
4037@}
4038@end smallexample
4039
4040Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4041
4042@itemize @bullet
4043@item
4044an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4045@item
4046a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4047@item
4048an output section description
4049@item
4050an overlay description
4051@end itemize
4052
4053The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4054@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4055those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4056understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4057the layout of the output file.
4058
4059Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4060below.
4061
4062If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4063linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4064section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4065input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4066example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4067in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4068
4069@menu
4070* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4071* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4072* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4073* Input Section:: Input section description
4074* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4075* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4076* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4077* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4078* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4079@end menu
4080
4081@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4082@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4083The full description of an output section looks like this:
4084@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4085@group
7e7d5768 4086@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4087 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4088 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4089 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4090 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4091 @{
4092 @var{output-section-command}
4093 @var{output-section-command}
4094 @dots{}
abc9061b 4095 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4096@end group
4097@end smallexample
4098
4099Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4100
4101The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4102name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4103The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4104the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4105The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4106
4107Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4108
4109@itemize @bullet
4110@item
4111a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4112@item
4113an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4114@item
4115data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4116@item
4117a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4118@end itemize
4119
4120@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4121@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4122@cindex name, section
4123@cindex section name
4124The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4125meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4126support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4127must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4128example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4129output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4130names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4131quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4132characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4133commas must be quoted.
4134
4135The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4136Discarding}.
4137
4138@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4139@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4140@cindex address, section
4141@cindex section address
4142The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4143address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4144is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4145
4146If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4147section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4148to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4149alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4150contained within the output section.
4151
4152The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4153
4154@itemize @bullet
4155@item
4156If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4157is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4158in that region.
4159
4160@item
4161If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4162regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4163section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4164be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4165
4166@item
4167If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4168the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4169counter.
4170@end itemize
4171
4172@noindent
4173For example:
4174
252b5132
RH
4175@smallexample
4176.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4177@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4178
252b5132
RH
4179@noindent
4180and
ea5cae92 4181
252b5132
RH
4182@smallexample
4183.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4184@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4185
252b5132
RH
4186@noindent
4187are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4188@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4189counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4190counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4191input sections.
252b5132
RH
4192
4193The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4194For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4195so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4196do something like this:
4197@smallexample
4198.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4199@end smallexample
4200@noindent
4201This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4202aligned upward to the specified value.
4203
4204Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4205location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4206sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4207
4208@node Input Section
36f63dca 4209@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4210@cindex input sections
4211@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4212The most common output section command is an input section description.
4213
4214The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4215You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4216in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4217map the input files into your memory layout.
4218
4219@menu
4220* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4221* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4222* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4223* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4224* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4225@end menu
4226
4227@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4228@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4229@cindex input section basics
4230An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4231by a list of section names in parentheses.
4232
4233The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4234describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4235
4236The most common input section description is to include all input
4237sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4238include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4239@smallexample
4240*(.text)
4241@end smallexample
4242@noindent
18625d54 4243Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4244@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4245of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4246match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4247example:
252b5132 4248@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4249EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4250@end smallexample
4251@noindent
4252will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4253and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4254placed inside the section list, for example:
4255@smallexample
b4346c09 4256*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4257@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4258@noindent
4259The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4260two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4261more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4262
4263There are two ways to include more than one section:
4264@smallexample
4265*(.text .rdata)
4266*(.text) *(.rdata)
4267@end smallexample
4268@noindent
4269The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4270@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4271first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4272they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4273@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4274@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4275
8f1732fc
AB
4276When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4277is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4278immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4279@smallexample
4280*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4281@end smallexample
4282@noindent
4283will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4284@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4285from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4286exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4287could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4288@smallexample
4289*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4290@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4291@noindent
4292Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4293before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4294all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4295@smallexample
4296EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4297@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4298
252b5132
RH
4299You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4300You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4301needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4302@smallexample
4303data.o(.data)
4304@end smallexample
4305
ae17ab41
CM
4306To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4307of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4308
4309Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4310
4311@smallexample
4312@group
4313SECTIONS @{
4314 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4315 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4316@}
4317@end group
4318@end smallexample
4319
4320In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4321input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4322@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4323@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4324whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4325
967928e9
AM
4326You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4327matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4328with no whitespace around the colon.
4329
4330@table @samp
4331@item archive:file
4332matches file within archive
4333@item archive:
4334matches the whole archive
4335@item :file
4336matches file but not one in an archive
4337@end table
4338
4339Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4340wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4341single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4342@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4343within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4344also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4345other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4346from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4347command.
4348
252b5132
RH
4349If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4350the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4351commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4352@smallexample
4353data.o
4354@end smallexample
4355
967928e9
AM
4356When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4357and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4358characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4359name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4360did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4361though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4362@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4363the archive search path.
4364
4365@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4366@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4367@cindex input section wildcards
4368@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4369@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4370@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4371In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4372name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4373
4374The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4375pattern for the file name.
4376
4377The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4378
4379@table @samp
4380@item *
4381matches any number of characters
4382@item ?
4383matches any single character
4384@item [@var{chars}]
4385matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4386character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4387@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4388@item \
4389quotes the following character
4390@end table
4391
4392When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4393will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4394Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4395exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4396@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4397a @samp{/} character.
4398
4399File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4400specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4401does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4402
4403If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4404appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4405will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4406sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4407@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4408@smallexample
4409.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4410.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4411@end smallexample
4412
bcaa7b3e 4413@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4414Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4415in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4416this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4417pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4418@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4419into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4420
bcaa7b3e
L
4421@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4422@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4423difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4424descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4425Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4426reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4427
02ecc8e9
L
4428@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4429@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4430difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4431ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4432encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4433
bcaa7b3e
L
4434@cindex SORT
4435@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4436
4437When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4438can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4439
4440@enumerate
4441@item
4442@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4443It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4444sections have the same name.
4445@item
4446@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4447It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4448sections have the same alignment.
4449@item
c0065db7 4450@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4451treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4452@item
4453@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4454is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4455@item
4456All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4457@end enumerate
4458
4459When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4460section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4461takes precedence over the command line option.
4462
4463If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4464command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4465treated as nested sorting command.
4466
4467@enumerate
4468@item
4469@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4470@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4471@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4472@item
4473@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4474@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4475@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4476@end enumerate
4477
4478If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4479command line option will be ignored.
4480
eda680f8
L
4481@cindex SORT_NONE
4482@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4483section sorting option.
4484
252b5132
RH
4485If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4486@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4487precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4488
4489This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4490files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4491sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4492The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4493with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4494linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4495@smallexample
4496@group
4497SECTIONS @{
4498 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4499 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4500 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4501 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4502@}
4503@end group
4504@end smallexample
4505
4506@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4507@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4508@cindex common symbol placement
4509@cindex uninitialized data placement
4510A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4511file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4512linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4513named @samp{COMMON}.
4514
4515You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4516other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4517particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4518input files are placed in another section.
4519
4520In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4521@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4522@smallexample
4523.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4524@end smallexample
4525
4526@cindex scommon section
4527@cindex small common symbols
4528Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4529example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4530symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4531different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4532the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4533symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4534to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4535locations.
4536
4537@cindex [COMMON]
4538You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4539notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4540@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4541
4542@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4543@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4544@cindex KEEP
4545@cindex garbage collection
4546When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4547it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4548This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4549with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4550@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4551
4552@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4553@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4554The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4555to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4556start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4557@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4558follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4559@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4560@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4561All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4562files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4563
4564@smallexample
4565@group
4566SECTIONS @{
4567 outputa 0x10000 :
4568 @{
4569 all.o
4570 foo.o (.input1)
4571 @}
36f63dca
NC
4572@end group
4573@group
252b5132
RH
4574 outputb :
4575 @{
4576 foo.o (.input2)
4577 foo1.o (.input1)
4578 @}
36f63dca
NC
4579@end group
4580@group
252b5132
RH
4581 outputc :
4582 @{
4583 *(.input1)
4584 *(.input2)
4585 @}
4586@}
4587@end group
a1ab1d2a 4588@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4589
4590@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4591@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4592@cindex data
4593@cindex section data
4594@cindex output section data
4595@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4596@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4597@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4598@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4599@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4600You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4601@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4602an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4603parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4604value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4605counter.
4606
4607The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4608store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4609bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4610stored.
4611
4612For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4613of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4614@smallexample
4615BYTE(1)
4616LONG(addr)
4617@end smallexample
4618
4619When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4620same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4621target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4622@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4623@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4624
4625If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4626which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4627When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4628true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4629endianness of the first input object file.
4630
36f63dca 4631Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4632between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4633@smallexample
4634SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4635@end smallexample
4636whereas this will work:
4637@smallexample
4638SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4639@end smallexample
4640
252b5132
RH
4641@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4642@cindex holes, filling
4643@cindex unspecified memory
4644You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4645current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4646otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4647gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4648with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4649necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4650point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4651than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4652different parts of an output section.
4653
4654This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4655value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4656@smallexample
563e308f 4657FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4658@end smallexample
4659
4660The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4661section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4662part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4663entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4664precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4665expression.
252b5132
RH
4666
4667@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4668@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4669There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4670commands.
4671
4672@table @code
4673@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4674@cindex input filename symbols
4675@cindex filename symbols
4676@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4677The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4678The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4679file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4680the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4681
4682This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4683normally used for any other object file format.
4684
4685@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4686@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4687@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4688@item CONSTRUCTORS
4689When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4690unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4691destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4692arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4693automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4694For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4695linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4696@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4697ignored for other object file formats.
4698
4699The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4700constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4701Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4702the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4703first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4704of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4705compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4706formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4707@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4708the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4709destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4710@code{exit}.
4711
4712For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4713arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4714addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4715and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4716linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4717runtime code expects to see.
4718
4719@smallexample
4720 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4721 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4722 *(.ctors)
4723 LONG(0)
4724 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4725 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4726 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4727 *(.dtors)
4728 LONG(0)
4729 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4730@end smallexample
4731
4732If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4733which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4734are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4735are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4736command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4737@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4738@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4739@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4740
4741Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4742and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4743need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4744scripts.
4745
4746@end table
4747
4748@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4749@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4750@cindex discarding sections
4751@cindex sections, discarding
4752@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4753The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4754This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4755may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4756@smallexample
49c13adb 4757.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4758@end smallexample
4759@noindent
4760will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4761@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4762sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4763space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4764too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4765space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4766@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4767@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4768This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4769
a0976ea4 4770The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4771on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4772symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4773the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4774section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4775
4776@cindex /DISCARD/
4777The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4778input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4779section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4780
4781@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4782@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4783@cindex output section attributes
4784We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4785like this:
0c71d759 4786
252b5132 4787@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4788@group
7e7d5768 4789@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4790 [AT(@var{lma})]
4791 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4792 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4793 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4794 @{
4795 @var{output-section-command}
4796 @var{output-section-command}
4797 @dots{}
562d3460 4798 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4799@end group
4800@end smallexample
0c71d759 4801
252b5132
RH
4802We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4803@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4804remaining section attributes.
4805
a1ab1d2a 4806@menu
252b5132
RH
4807* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4808* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4809* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4810* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4811* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4812* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4813* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4814* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4815@end menu
4816
4817@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4818@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4819Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4820parentheses. The following types are defined:
4821
4822@table @code
4823@item NOLOAD
4824The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4825loaded into memory when the program is run.
4826@item DSECT
4827@itemx COPY
4828@itemx INFO
4829@itemx OVERLAY
4830These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4831rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4832marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4833section when the program is run.
4834@end table
4835
4836@kindex NOLOAD
4837@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4838@cindex loading, preventing
4839The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4840the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4841the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4842@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4843need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4844@smallexample
4845@group
4846SECTIONS @{
4847 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4848 @dots{}
4849@}
4850@end group
4851@end smallexample
4852
4853@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4854@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4855@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4856@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4857@cindex load address
4858@cindex section load address
4859Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4860@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4861@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4862specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4863address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4864
ea5cae92
NC
4865The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4866specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4867takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4868load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4869region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4870
4871If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4872section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4873load address:
4874
4875@itemize @bullet
4876@item
4877If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4878the LMA address as well.
4879
4880@item
4881If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4882
4883@item
4884Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4885with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4886section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4887VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4888the last section in the located region.
4889
4890@item
4891If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4892that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4893
4894@item
4895If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4896section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4897@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4898
4899@cindex ROM initialized data
4900@cindex initialized data in ROM
4901This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4902example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4903called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4904@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4905even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4906uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4907defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4908counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4909
4910@smallexample
4911@group
4912SECTIONS
4913 @{
4914 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4915 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4916 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4917 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4918 .bss 0x3000 :
4919 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4920@}
4921@end group
4922@end smallexample
4923
4924The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4925this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4926the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4927how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4928script.
4929
4930@smallexample
4931@group
4932extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4933char *src = &_etext;
4934char *dst = &_data;
4935
ea5cae92
NC
4936/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4937while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4938 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4939
ea5cae92 4940/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4941for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4942 *dst = 0;
4943@end group
4944@end smallexample
4945
bbf115d3
L
4946@node Forced Output Alignment
4947@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4948@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4949@cindex forcing output section alignment
4950@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4951You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4952alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4953intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4954
7e7d5768
AM
4955@node Forced Input Alignment
4956@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4957@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4958@cindex forcing input section alignment
4959@cindex input section alignment
4960You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4961SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4962sections, whether larger or smaller.
4963
0c71d759
NC
4964@node Output Section Constraint
4965@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4966@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4967@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4968@cindex constraints on output sections
4969You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4970of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4971read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4972@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4973
252b5132 4974@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4975@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4976@kindex >@var{region}
4977@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4978@cindex memory regions and sections
4979You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4980using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4981
4982Here is a simple example:
4983@smallexample
4984@group
4985MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4986SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4987@end group
4988@end smallexample
4989
4990@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4991@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4992@kindex :@var{phdr}
4993@cindex section, assigning to program header
4994@cindex program headers and sections
4995You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4996using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4997one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4998assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4999@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5000linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5001
5002Here is a simple example:
5003@smallexample
5004@group
5005PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5006SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5007@end group
5008@end smallexample
5009
5010@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5011@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5012@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5013@cindex section fill pattern
5014@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5015You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5016@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5017(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5018within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5019alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5020necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5021of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5022an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5023fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5024other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5025pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5026expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5027
5028You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5029output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5030
5031Here is a simple example:
5032@smallexample
5033@group
563e308f 5034SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5035@end group
5036@end smallexample
5037
5038@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5039@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5040@kindex OVERLAY
5041@cindex overlays
5042An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5043are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5044the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5045copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5046required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5047can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5048than another.
5049
5050Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5051@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5052output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5053command is as follows:
5054@smallexample
5055@group
5056OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5057 @{
5058 @var{secname1}
5059 @{
5060 @var{output-section-command}
5061 @var{output-section-command}
5062 @dots{}
5063 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5064 @var{secname2}
5065 @{
5066 @var{output-section-command}
5067 @var{output-section-command}
5068 @dots{}
5069 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5070 @dots{}
abc9061b 5071 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5072@end group
5073@end smallexample
5074
5075Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5076section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5077section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5078those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5079except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5080sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5081
abc9061b
CC
5082The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5083the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5084
252b5132
RH
5085The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5086addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5087memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5088whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5089and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5090and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5091
56dd11f0
NC
5092If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5093references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5094the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5095sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5096@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5097
5098For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5099provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5100defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5101@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5102the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5103within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5104symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5105
5106At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5107the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5108
5109Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5110@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5111@smallexample
5112@group
5113 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5114 @{
5115 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5116 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5117 @}
5118@end group
5119@end smallexample
5120@noindent
5121This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5122address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5123@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5124following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5125@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5126@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5127
5128C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5129like the following.
5130
5131@smallexample
5132@group
5133 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5134 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5135 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5136@end group
5137@end smallexample
5138
5139Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5140everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5141example could have been written identically as follows.
5142
5143@smallexample
5144@group
5145 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5146 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5147 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5148 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5149 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5150 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5151 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5152@end group
5153@end smallexample
5154
5155@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5156@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5157@kindex MEMORY
5158@cindex memory regions
5159@cindex regions of memory
5160@cindex allocating memory
5161@cindex discontinuous memory
5162The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5163memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5164
5165The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5166memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5167may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5168can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5169set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5170regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5171around to fit into the available regions.
5172
127fcdff
AB
5173A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5174however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5175specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5176@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5177@smallexample
5178@group
a1ab1d2a 5179MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5180 @{
5181 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5182 @dots{}
5183 @}
5184@end group
5185@end smallexample
5186
5187The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5188region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5189Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5190with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5191must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5192add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5193command.
252b5132
RH
5194
5195@cindex memory region attributes
5196The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5197whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5198not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5199@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5200section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5201the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5202them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5203
5204The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5205@table @samp
5206@item R
5207Read-only section
5208@item W
5209Read/write section
5210@item X
5211Executable section
5212@item A
5213Allocatable section
5214@item I
5215Initialized section
5216@item L
5217Same as @samp{I}
5218@item !
c09e9a8c 5219Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5220@end table
5221
5222If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5223@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5224attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5225in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5226attributes.
5227
5228@kindex ORIGIN =
5229@kindex o =
5230@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5231The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5232the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5233cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5234abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5235@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5236
5237@kindex LENGTH =
5238@kindex len =
5239@kindex l =
5240The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5241region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5242be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5243@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5244
5245In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5246available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5247and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5248linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5249is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5250or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5251explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5252region.
5253
5254@smallexample
5255@group
a1ab1d2a 5256MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5257 @{
5258 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5259 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5260 @}
5261@end group
5262@end smallexample
5263
5264Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5265specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5266@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5267a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5268output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5269was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5270the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5271output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5272region, the linker will issue an error message.
5273
3ec57632 5274It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5275expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5276@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5277
5278@smallexample
5279@group
c0065db7 5280 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5281@end group
5282@end smallexample
5283
252b5132
RH
5284@node PHDRS
5285@section PHDRS Command
5286@kindex PHDRS
5287@cindex program headers
5288@cindex ELF program headers
5289@cindex program segments
5290@cindex segments, ELF
5291The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5292@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5293loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5294program with the @samp{-p} option.
5295
5296When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5297reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5298program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5299This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5300interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5301
5302The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5303in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5304precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5305the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5306not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5307
5308The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5309generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5310ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5311
5312This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5313@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5314
5315@smallexample
5316@group
5317PHDRS
5318@{
5319 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5320 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5321@}
5322@end group
5323@end smallexample
5324
5325The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5326of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5327header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5328with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5329must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5330is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5331
5332Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5333system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5334specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5335sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5336attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5337Section Phdr}.
5338
5339It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5340merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5341repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5342contain the section.
5343
5344If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5345then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5346not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5347convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5348placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5349default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5350segment at all.
5351
5352@kindex FILEHDR
5353@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5354You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5355the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5356The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5357file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5358include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5359segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5360these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5361
5362The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5363value of the keyword.
5364
5365@table @asis
5366@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5367Indicates an unused program header.
5368
5369@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5370Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5371the file.
5372
5373@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5374Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5375
5376@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5377Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5378found.
5379
5380@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5381Indicates a segment holding note information.
5382
5383@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5384A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5385ABI.
5386
5387@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5388Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5389
1a9ccd70
NC
5390@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5391Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5392
252b5132
RH
5393@item @var{expression}
5394An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5395be used for types not defined above.
5396@end table
5397
5398You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5399in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5400@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5401Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5402output section attribute.
5403
5404The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5405which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5406explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5407an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5408header.
5409
5410Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5411headers used on a native ELF system.
5412
5413@example
5414@group
5415PHDRS
5416@{
5417 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5418 interp PT_INTERP ;
5419 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5420 data PT_LOAD ;
5421 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5422@}
5423
5424SECTIONS
5425@{
5426 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5427 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5428 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5429 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5430 @dots{}
5431 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5432 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5433 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5434 @dots{}
5435@}
5436@end group
5437@end example
5438
5439@node VERSION
5440@section VERSION Command
5441@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5442@cindex symbol versions
5443@cindex version script
5444@cindex versions of symbols
5445The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5446only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5447symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5448a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5449shared library.
5450
5451You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5452you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5453also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5454
5455The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5456@smallexample
5457VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5458@end smallexample
5459
5460The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5461Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5462version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5463version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5464version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5465scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5466library.
5467
5468The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5469examples.
5470
5471@smallexample
5472VERS_1.1 @{
5473 global:
5474 foo1;
5475 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5476 old*;
5477 original*;
5478 new*;
252b5132
RH
5479@};
5480
5481VERS_1.2 @{
5482 foo2;
5483@} VERS_1.1;
5484
5485VERS_2.0 @{
5486 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5487 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5488 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5489 "f(int, double)";
5490 @};
252b5132
RH
5491@} VERS_1.2;
5492@end smallexample
5493
5494This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5495version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5496The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5497a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5498of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5499symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5500is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5501in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5502However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5503name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5504
5505Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5506depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5507to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5508
5509Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5510depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5511and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5512
5513When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5514specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5515unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5516unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5517somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5518wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5519wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5520set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5521ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5522
5523The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5524they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5525could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5526However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5527
0f6bf451 5528Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5529in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5530symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5531won't.
5532
5533@smallexample
7c9c73be 5534@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5535@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5536
252b5132
RH
5537When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5538symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5539requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5540shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5541loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5542linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5543application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5544way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5545all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5546search for each symbol reference.
5547
5548The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5549doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5550that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5551functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5552the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5553required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5554that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5555versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5556the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5557
5558There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5559first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5560source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5561script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5562maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5563@smallexample
5564__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5565@end smallexample
5566@noindent
5567in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5568be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5569The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5570@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5571takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5572
5573The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5574function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5575an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5576version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5577linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5578
5579To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5580source file. Here is an example:
5581
5582@smallexample
5583__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5584__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5585__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5586__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5587@end smallexample
5588
5589In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5590unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5591example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5592@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5593
5594When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5595some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5596this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5597@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5598declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5599you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5600
5601If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5602within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5603(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5604specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5605
cb840a31
L
5606You can also specify the language in the version script:
5607
5608@smallexample
5609VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5610@end smallexample
5611
c0065db7 5612The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5613The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5614demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5615patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5616@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5617
86043bbb
MM
5618Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5619described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5620or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5621the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5622whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5623cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5624might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5625should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5626expect when you upgrade.
5627
252b5132
RH
5628@node Expressions
5629@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5630@cindex expressions
5631@cindex arithmetic
5632The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5633that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5634expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5635host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5636
5637You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5638
5639The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5640expressions.
5641
5642@menu
5643* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5644* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5645* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5646* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5647* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5648* Operators:: Operators
5649* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5650* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5651* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5652@end menu
5653
5654@node Constants
5655@subsection Constants
5656@cindex integer notation
5657@cindex constants in linker scripts
5658All constants are integers.
5659
5660As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5661octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5662hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5663@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5664@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5665value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5666
5667@cindex scaled integers
5668@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5669@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5670@cindex suffixes for integers
5671@cindex integer suffixes
5672In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5673constant by
5674@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5675@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5676@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5677@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5678@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5679@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5680@tex
5681${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5682@end tex
5683@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5684respectively. For example, the following
5685all refer to the same quantity:
5686
252b5132 5687@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5688_fourk_1 = 4K;
5689_fourk_2 = 4096;
5690_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5691_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5692@end smallexample
5693
8a308ae8
NC
5694Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5695conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5696
0c71d759
NC
5697@node Symbolic Constants
5698@subsection Symbolic Constants
5699@cindex symbolic constants
5700@kindex CONSTANT
5701It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5702the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5703
5704@table @code
5705@item MAXPAGESIZE
5706@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5707The target's maximum page size.
5708
5709@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5710@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5711The target's default page size.
5712@end table
5713
5714So for example:
5715
5716@smallexample
9d5777a3 5717 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5718@end smallexample
5719
5720will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5721supported by the target.
5722
252b5132
RH
5723@node Symbols
5724@subsection Symbol Names
5725@cindex symbol names
5726@cindex names
5727@cindex quoted symbol names
5728@kindex "
5729Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5730and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5731Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5732specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5733keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5734@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5735"SECTION" = 9;
5736"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5737@end smallexample
5738
5739Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5740to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5741whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5742
ecca9871
L
5743@node Orphan Sections
5744@subsection Orphan Sections
5745@cindex orphan
5746Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5747are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5748script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5749output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5750placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5751attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5752same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5753If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5754at the end of the file.
5755
5756For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5757well as section flag.
5758
c005eb9e
AB
5759The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5760(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5761output sections an orphan is placed in.
5762
41911f68 5763If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5764the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5765__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5766section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5767orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5768representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5769character.
5770
252b5132
RH
5771@node Location Counter
5772@subsection The Location Counter
5773@kindex .
5774@cindex dot
5775@cindex location counter
5776@cindex current output location
5777The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5778current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5779location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5780within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5781anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5782
5783@cindex holes
5784Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5785moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5786location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5787and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5788doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5789
5790@smallexample
5791SECTIONS
5792@{
5793 output :
5794 @{
5795 file1(.text)
5796 . = . + 1000;
5797 file2(.text)
5798 . += 1000;
5799 file3(.text)
563e308f 5800 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5801@}
5802@end smallexample
5803@noindent
5804In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5805located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5806followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5807@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5808@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5809specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5810
5c6bbab8
NC
5811@cindex dot inside sections
5812Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5813current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5814statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5815absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5816however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5817not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5818
5819@smallexample
5820SECTIONS
5821@{
5822 . = 0x100
5823 .text: @{
5824 *(.text)
5825 . = 0x200
5826 @}
5827 . = 0x500
5828 .data: @{
5829 *(.data)
5830 . += 0x600
5831 @}
5832@}
5833@end smallexample
5834
5835The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5836and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5837the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5838much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5839move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5840and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5841the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5842the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5843
b5666f2f
AM
5844@cindex dot outside sections
5845Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5846output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5847needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5848
5849@smallexample
5850SECTIONS
5851@{
5852 start_of_text = . ;
5853 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5854 end_of_text = . ;
5855
5856 start_of_data = . ;
5857 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5858 end_of_data = . ;
5859@}
5860@end smallexample
5861
5862If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5863not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5864between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5865should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5866blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5867the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5868sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5869statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5870special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5871place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5872as follows:
5873
5874@smallexample
5875SECTIONS
5876@{
5877 start_of_text = . ;
5878 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5879 end_of_text = . ;
5880
5881 start_of_data = . ;
5882 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5883 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5884 end_of_data = . ;
5885@}
5886@end smallexample
5887
5888This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5889@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5890placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5891assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5892a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5893section. So you could write:
5894
5895@smallexample
5896SECTIONS
5897@{
5898 start_of_text = . ;
5899 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5900 end_of_text = . ;
5901
5902 . = . ;
5903 start_of_data = . ;
5904 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5905 end_of_data = . ;
5906@}
5907@end smallexample
5908
5909Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5910@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5911
252b5132
RH
5912@need 2000
5913@node Operators
5914@subsection Operators
5915@cindex operators for arithmetic
5916@cindex arithmetic operators
5917@cindex precedence in expressions
5918The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5919the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5920@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5921@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5922@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5923@smallexample
5924precedence associativity Operators Notes
5925(highest)
59261 left ! - ~ (1)
59272 left * / %
59283 left + -
59294 left >> <<
59305 left == != > < <= >=
59316 left &
59327 left |
59338 left &&
59349 left ||
593510 right ? :
593611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5937(lowest)
5938@end smallexample
5939Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5940(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5941(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5942@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5943@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5944@tex
5945\vskip \baselineskip
5946%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5947\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5948\hrule
5949\halign
5950{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5951height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5952&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5953height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5954\noalign{\hrule}
5955height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5956&highest&&&&&\cr
5957% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5958&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5959&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5960&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5961&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5962&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5963&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5964&7&&left&&|&\cr
5965&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5966&9&&left&&||&\cr
5967&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5968&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5969&lowest&&&&&\cr
5970height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5971\hrule}
5972@end tex
5973@iftex
5974{
5975@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5976@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5977@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5978}
5979@end iftex
5980@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5981
5982@node Evaluation
5983@subsection Evaluation
5984@cindex lazy evaluation
5985@cindex expression evaluation order
5986The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5987an expression when absolutely necessary.
5988
5989The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5990address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5991regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5992as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5993
5994However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5995until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5996other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5997for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5998
5999The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6000assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6001allocation.
6002
6003Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6004@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6005
6006If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6007available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6008following
6009@smallexample
6010@group
6011SECTIONS
6012 @{
a1ab1d2a 6013 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6014 @{ *(.text) @}
6015 @}
6016@end group
6017@end smallexample
6018@noindent
6019will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6020address}.
6021
6022@node Expression Section
6023@subsection The Section of an Expression
6024@cindex expression sections
6025@cindex absolute expressions
6026@cindex relative expressions
6027@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6028@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6029@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6030Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6031relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6032using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6033value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6034symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6035operations.
6036
abf4be64
AM
6037Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6038section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6039address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6040@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6041functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6042One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6043(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6044differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6045versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6046section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6047Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6048absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6049given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6050everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6051
6052In the following simple example,
252b5132 6053
7542af2a
AM
6054@smallexample
6055@group
6056SECTIONS
6057 @{
6058 . = 0x100;
6059 __executable_start = 0x100;
6060 .data :
6061 @{
6062 . = 0x10;
6063 __data_start = 0x10;
6064 *(.data)
6065 @}
6066 @dots{}
6067 @}
6068@end group
6069@end smallexample
252b5132 6070
7542af2a
AM
6071both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6072address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6073@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6074section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6075
5c3049d2
AM
6076For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6077addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6078
6079@itemize @bullet
6080@item
c05f749e
AM
6081Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6082operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6083absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6084@item
7542af2a
AM
6085Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6086relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6087and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6088@item
c05f749e
AM
6089Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6090in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6091address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6092before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6093@end itemize
6094
6095The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6096
6097@itemize @bullet
6098@item
6099An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6100@item
6101The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6102@item
9bc8bb33 6103The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6104relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6105(after above conversions) is also a number when
6106@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6107but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6108@item
6109The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6110relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6111section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6112@item
6113The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6114conversions) is an absolute address.
6115@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6116
6117You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6118to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6119create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6120section @samp{.data}:
6121@smallexample
6122SECTIONS
6123 @{
6124 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6125 @}
6126@end smallexample
6127@noindent
6128If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6129@samp{.data} section.
6130
7542af2a
AM
6131Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6132particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6133
252b5132
RH
6134@node Builtin Functions
6135@subsection Builtin Functions
6136@cindex functions in expressions
6137The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6138use in linker script expressions.
6139
6140@table @code
6141@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6142@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6143@cindex expression, absolute
6144Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6145of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6146value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6147normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6148
6149@item ADDR(@var{section})
6150@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6151@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6152Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6153script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6154the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6155@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6156@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6157the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6158@smallexample
6159@group
6160SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6161 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6162 @{
252b5132
RH
6163 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6164 @dots{}
6165 @}
6166 .output :
6167 @{
6168 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6169 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6170 @}
6171@dots{} @}
6172@end group
6173@end smallexample
6174
876f4090
NS
6175@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6176@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6177@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6178@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6179@cindex round up location counter
6180@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6181@cindex round up expression
6182@cindex align expression
6183Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6184to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6185doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6186arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6187expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6188equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6189
6190Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6191next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6192variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6193input sections:
252b5132
RH
6194@smallexample
6195@group
6196SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6197 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6198 *(.data)
6199 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6200 @}
6201@dots{} @}
6202@end group
6203@end smallexample
6204@noindent
6205The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6206a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6207a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6208of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6209
6210The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6211
362c1d1a
NS
6212@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6213@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6214@cindex section alignment
6215Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6216been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6217evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6218the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6219value in that section.
6220@smallexample
6221@group
6222SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6223 .output @{
6224 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6225 @dots{}
6226 @}
6227@dots{} @}
6228@end group
6229@end smallexample
6230
252b5132
RH
6231@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6232@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6233This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6234scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6235section.
6236
2d20f7bf
JJ
6237@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6238@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6239This is equivalent to either
6240@smallexample
6241(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6242@end smallexample
6243or
6244@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6245(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6246 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6247@end smallexample
6248@noindent
6249depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6250for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6251@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6252If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6253memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6254bytes in the on-disk file.
6255
6256This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6257any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6258@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6259be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6260working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6261
6262@noindent
6263Example:
6264@smallexample
6265 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6266@end smallexample
6267
6268@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6269@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6270This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6271evaluation purposes.
6272
6273@smallexample
6274 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6275@end smallexample
6276
a4f5ad88
JJ
6277@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6278@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6279This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6280@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6281When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6282does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6283@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6284boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6285it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6286@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6287padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6288section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6289
6290@smallexample
6291 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6292@end smallexample
6293
252b5132
RH
6294@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6295@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6296@cindex symbol defaults
6297Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6298defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6299return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6300default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6301shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6302the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6303existed, its value is preserved:
6304
6305@smallexample
6306@group
6307SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6308 .text : @{
6309 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6310 @dots{}
6311 @}
6312 @dots{}
6313@}
6314@end group
6315@end smallexample
6316
3ec57632
NC
6317@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6318@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6319Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6320
252b5132
RH
6321@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6322@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6323@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6324Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6325Section LMA}).
6326
2e53f7d6
NC
6327@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6328@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6329Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6330@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6331
252b5132
RH
6332@kindex MAX
6333@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6334Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6335
6336@kindex MIN
6337@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6338Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6339
6340@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6341@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6342@cindex unallocated address, next
6343Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6344This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6345use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6346output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6347
3ec57632
NC
6348@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6349@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6350Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6351
ba916c8a
MM
6352@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6353@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6354Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6355value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6356@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6357will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6358can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6359``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6360name.
6361
252b5132
RH
6362@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6363@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6364@cindex section size
6365Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6366been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6367evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6368@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6369@smallexample
6370@group
6371SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6372 .output @{
6373 .start = . ;
6374 @dots{}
6375 .end = . ;
6376 @}
6377 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6378 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6379@dots{} @}
6380@end group
6381@end smallexample
6382
6383@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6384@itemx sizeof_headers
6385@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6386@cindex header size
6387Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6388information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6389this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6390choose, to facilitate paging.
6391
6392@cindex not enough room for program headers
6393@cindex program headers, not enough room
6394When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6395@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6396number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6397addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6398additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6399room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6400the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6401script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6402you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6403command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6404@end table
6405
6406@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6407@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6408@cindex implicit linker scripts
6409If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6410an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6411linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6412linker will report an error.
6413
6414An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6415
6416Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6417assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6418commands.
6419
6420Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6421at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6422read. This can affect archive searching.
6423
6424@ifset GENERIC
6425@node Machine Dependent
6426@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6427
6428@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6429@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6430sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6431functionality are not listed.
6432
6433@menu
36f63dca
NC
6434@ifset H8300
6435* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6436@end ifset
6437@ifset I960
6438* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6439@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6440@ifset M68HC11
6441* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6442@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6443@ifset ARM
6444* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6445@end ifset
6446@ifset HPPA
6447* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6448@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6449@ifset M68K
6450* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6451@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6452@ifset MIPS
6453* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6454@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6455@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6456* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6457@end ifset
2469cfa2 6458@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6459* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6460@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6461@ifset NDS32
6462* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6463@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6464@ifset NIOSII
6465* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6466@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6467@ifset POWERPC
6468* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6469@end ifset
6470@ifset POWERPC64
6471* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6472@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6473@ifset SPU
6474* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6475@end ifset
74459f0e 6476@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6477* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6478@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6479@ifset WIN32
6480* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6481@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6482@ifset XTENSA
6483* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6484@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6485@end menu
6486@end ifset
6487
252b5132
RH
6488@ifset H8300
6489@ifclear GENERIC
6490@raisesections
6491@end ifclear
6492
6493@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6494@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6495
6496@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6497For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6498you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6499
6500@table @emph
6501@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6502@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6503@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6504targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6505program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6506respectively.
6507
6508@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6509@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6510@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6511@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6512sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6513page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6514(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6515@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6516top page of memory).
1502569c 6517
81f5558e
NC
6518@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6519indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6520displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6521the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6522@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6523whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6524range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6525
1502569c 6526@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6527@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6528biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6529which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6530page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6531(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6532@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6533the top page of memory).
6534
6535@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6536@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
653732 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6538changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6539(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6540@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6541the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6542@end table
6543
6544@ifclear GENERIC
6545@lowersections
6546@end ifclear
6547@end ifset
6548
36f63dca 6549@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6550@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6551@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6552@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6553@node Renesas
6554@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6555
c2dcd04e
NC
6556@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6557H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6558options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6559@end ifset
6560@end ifclear
6561
6562@ifset I960
6563@ifclear GENERIC
6564@raisesections
6565@end ifclear
6566
6567@node i960
6568@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6569
6570@cindex i960 support
6571
6572You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6573specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6574family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6575incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6576linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6577libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6578search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6579
6580For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6581well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6582paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6583the names
6584
6585@smallexample
6586@group
6587try
6588libtry.a
6589tryca
6590libtryca.a
6591@end group
6592@end smallexample
6593
6594@noindent
6595The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6596two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6597
6598You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6599the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6600use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6601specifies a library.
6602
6603@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6604@cindex relaxing on i960
6605@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6606you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6607@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6608them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6609instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6610instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6611target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6612not itself call any subroutines).
6613
6614@ifclear GENERIC
6615@lowersections
6616@end ifclear
6617@end ifset
6618
6619@ifset ARM
6620@ifclear GENERIC
6621@raisesections
6622@end ifclear
6623
93fd0973
SC
6624@ifset M68HC11
6625@ifclear GENERIC
6626@raisesections
6627@end ifclear
6628
6629@node M68HC11/68HC12
6630@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6631
6632@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6633
6634@subsection Linker Relaxation
6635
6636For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6637optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6638
6639@table @emph
6640@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6641@item relaxing address modes
6642@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6643targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6644program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6645respectively.
6646
6647@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6648transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6649page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6650
6651@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6652When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6653of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6654addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6655@code{bset} instructions.
6656
6657@end table
6658
6659@subsection Trampoline Generation
6660
6661@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6662@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6663For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6664call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6665will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6666trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6667case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6668point to the function trampoline.
6669
6670@ifclear GENERIC
6671@lowersections
6672@end ifclear
6673@end ifset
6674
36f63dca 6675@node ARM
3674e28a 6676@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6677
6678@cindex ARM interworking support
6679@kindex --support-old-code
6680For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6681between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6682been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6683line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6684libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6685option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6686given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6687which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6688the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6689non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6690
6691@cindex thumb entry point
6692@cindex entry point, thumb
6693@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6694The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6695@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6696But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6697branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6698executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6699
ce11ba6c
KT
6700@cindex PE import table prefixing
6701@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6702The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6703the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6704element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6705import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6706
e489d0ae
PB
6707@cindex BE8
6708@kindex --be8
6709The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6710executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6711objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6712option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6713little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6714
3674e28a
PB
6715@cindex TARGET1
6716@kindex --target1-rel
6717@kindex --target1-abs
6718The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6719@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6720or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6721and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6722
6723@cindex TARGET2
6724@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6725The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6726@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6727meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6728@table @samp
6729@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6730@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6731@item abs
6732@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6733@item got-rel
6734@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6735@end table
6736
319850b4
JB
6737@cindex FIX_V4BX
6738@kindex --fix-v4bx
6739The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6740specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6741interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6742also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6743
6744In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6745linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6746@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6747
6748In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6749relocations are ignored.
6750
845b51d6
PB
6751@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6752@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6753Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6754relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6755
6756@smallexample
6757TST rM, #1
6758MOVEQ PC, rM
6759BX Rn
6760@end smallexample
6761
6762This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6763and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6764condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6765
33bfe774
JB
6766@cindex USE_BLX
6767@kindex --use-blx
6768The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6769BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6770situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6771code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6772each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6773
6774This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6775specify it if you are using that target.
6776
c6dd86c6
JB
6777@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6778@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6779The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6780bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6781instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6782to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6783the support code can read the intended values.
6784
6785The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6786intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6787and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6788intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6789full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6790you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6791
6792If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6793enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6794@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6795mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6796vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6797@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6798
6799If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6800potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6801such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6802first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6803instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6804the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6805are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6806
2de70689
MGD
6807@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6808@kindex --fix-arm1176
6809@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6810The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6811in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6812are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6813unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6814
9d5777a3 6815Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6816Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6817http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6818
a504d23a
LA
6819@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6820@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6821
6822The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6823workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6824the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6825off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6826the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6827core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6828integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6829VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6830
6831The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6832necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6833
6834The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6835@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6836STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6837linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6838@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6839
6840If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6841potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6842such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6843replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6844branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6845then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6846
6847The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6848the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6849
6850The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6851they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6852there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6853occurs.
6854
6855The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6856PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6857large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6858cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6859occurs.
6860
bf21ed78
MS
6861@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6862@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6863The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6864warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6865enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6866linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6867using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6868not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6869
6870@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6871@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6872The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6873warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6874@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6875linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6876using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6877
726150b7
NC
6878@cindex PIC_VENEER
6879@kindex --pic-veneer
6880The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6881ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6882is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6883@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6884
6885@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6886@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6887The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6888code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6889perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6890placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6891controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6892The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6893duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6894group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6895code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6896where they should be placed.
6897
6898The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6899@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6900placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6901branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6902placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6903value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6904exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6905A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6906linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6907from the input sections.
6908
6909The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6910@samp{N = +1}.
6911
1a51c1a4
NC
6912Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6913only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6914otherwise.
6915
1db37fe6
YG
6916@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6917@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6918@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6919The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6920
6921The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6922
68fcca92
JW
6923@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6924@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6925@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6926The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6927
6928Please contact ARM for further details.
6929
1db37fe6
YG
6930@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6931@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6932@cindex Merging exidx entries
6933The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6934
6935@kindex --long-plt
6936@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6937The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6938which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6939entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6940
1f56df9d
JW
6941@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
6942@cindex AArch64 rela addend
6943The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
6944link-time values for dynamic relocations.
6945
4ba2ef8f
TP
6946@cindex Placement of SG veneers
6947All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
6948Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
6949@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
6950veneers in memory.
6951
54ddd295
TP
6952@kindex --cmse-implib
6953@cindex Secure gateway import library
6954The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
6955specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
6956secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
6957executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
6958
0955507f
TP
6959@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
6960@cindex Input import library
6961The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
6962must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
6963given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
6964in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
6965@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
6966library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
6967library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
6968for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
6969specified.
6970
36f63dca
NC
6971@ifclear GENERIC
6972@lowersections
6973@end ifclear
6974@end ifset
6975
6976@ifset HPPA
6977@ifclear GENERIC
6978@raisesections
6979@end ifclear
6980
6981@node HPPA ELF32
6982@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6983@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6984@kindex --multi-subspace
6985When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6986import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6987The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6988stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6989multiple sub-spaces.
6990
6991@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6992@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6993Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6994stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6995@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6996sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6997a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6998the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6999conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7000prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7001A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7002branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7003@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7004@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7005detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7006positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7007
7008Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7009single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7010create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7011large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7012
7013@ifclear GENERIC
7014@lowersections
7015@end ifclear
7016@end ifset
7017
7fb9f789
NC
7018@ifset M68K
7019@ifclear GENERIC
7020@raisesections
7021@end ifclear
7022
7023@node M68K
7024@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7025
7026@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7027@kindex --got=@var{type}
7028The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7029The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7030@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7031the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7032@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7033entries only at non-negative offsets.
7034@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7035entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7036support such GOTs.
7037@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7038output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7039file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7040files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7041
7042@ifclear GENERIC
7043@lowersections
7044@end ifclear
7045@end ifset
7046
833794fc
MR
7047@ifset MIPS
7048@ifclear GENERIC
7049@raisesections
7050@end ifclear
7051
7052@node MIPS
7053@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7054
7055@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7056@kindex --insn32
7057@kindex --no-insn32
7058The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7059microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7060in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7061used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7062or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7063including 16-bit ones where possible.
7064
7065@ifclear GENERIC
7066@lowersections
7067@end ifclear
7068@end ifset
7069
36f63dca
NC
7070@ifset MMIX
7071@ifclear GENERIC
7072@raisesections
7073@end ifclear
7074
7075@node MMIX
7076@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7077For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7078@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7079understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7080can translate between the two formats.
7081
7082There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7083Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7084registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7085equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7086@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7087global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7088this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7089symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7090
7a2de473
HPN
7091Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7092@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7093The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7094of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7095
7096Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7097are left out from an mmo file.
7098
7099@ifclear GENERIC
7100@lowersections
7101@end ifclear
7102@end ifset
7103
7104@ifset MSP430
7105@ifclear GENERIC
7106@raisesections
7107@end ifclear
7108
7109@node MSP430
7110@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7111For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7112will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7113just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7114
7115@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7116The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7117
7118@table @code
7119@item @samp{.vectors}
7120Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7121
7122@item @samp{.bootloader}
7123Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7124in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7125
7126@item @samp{.infomem}
7127Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7128this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7129
c0065db7 7130@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7131This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7132in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7133
7134@item @samp{.noinit}
7135Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7136
c0065db7 7137The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7138@end table
7139
7140@ifclear GENERIC
7141@lowersections
7142@end ifclear
7143@end ifset
7144
35c08157
KLC
7145@ifset NDS32
7146@ifclear GENERIC
7147@raisesections
7148@end ifclear
7149
7150@node NDS32
7151@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7152@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7153For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7154relaxes objects according to these options.
7155
7156@table @code
7157@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7158Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7159
7160@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7161Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7162
7163@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7164Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7165
7166@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7167Export the EX9 table after linking.
7168
7169@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7170Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7171
7172@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7173Update the existing EX9 table.
7174
7175@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7176Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7177
7178@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7179Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7180
7181@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7182Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7183
7184@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7185Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7186@end table
7187
7188@ifclear GENERIC
7189@lowersections
7190@end ifclear
7191@end ifset
7192
78058a5e
SL
7193@ifset NIOSII
7194@ifclear GENERIC
7195@raisesections
7196@end ifclear
7197
7198@node Nios II
7199@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7200@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7201@kindex --relax on Nios II
7202
7203Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7204transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7205which may result in @command{ld} giving
7206@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7207The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7208trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7209outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7210trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7211be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7212larger than 256MB.
7213
7214The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7215is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7216@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7217locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7218source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7219register as a temporary.
7220
7221Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7222relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7223option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7224
7225@ifclear GENERIC
7226@lowersections
7227@end ifclear
7228@end ifset
7229
2a60a7a8
AM
7230@ifset POWERPC
7231@ifclear GENERIC
7232@raisesections
7233@end ifclear
7234
7235@node PowerPC ELF32
7236@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7237@cindex PowerPC long branches
7238@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7239Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7240displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7241@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7242@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7243the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7244section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7245section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7246@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7247both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7248considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7249
7250@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7251@table @option
7252@cindex PowerPC PLT
7253@kindex --bss-plt
7254@item --bss-plt
7255Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7256generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7257the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7258writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7259@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7260PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7261compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7262BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7263
016687f8
AM
7264@kindex --secure-plt
7265@item --secure-plt
7266@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7267@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7268when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7269layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7270style BSS PLT.
7271
2a60a7a8
AM
7272@cindex PowerPC GOT
7273@kindex --sdata-got
7274@item --sdata-got
7275The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7276sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7277@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7278section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7279@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7280@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7281@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7282@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7283PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7284pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7285GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7286really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7287
7288@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7289@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7290@item --emit-stub-syms
7291This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7292symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7293
7294@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7295@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7296@item --no-tls-optimize
7297PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7298sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7299disable the optimization.
7300@end table
7301
7302@ifclear GENERIC
7303@lowersections
7304@end ifclear
7305@end ifset
7306
7307@ifset POWERPC64
7308@ifclear GENERIC
7309@raisesections
7310@end ifclear
7311
7312@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7313@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7314
7315@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7316@table @option
7317@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7318@kindex --stub-group-size
7319@item --stub-group-size
7320Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7321by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7322@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7323sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7324a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7325the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7326conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7327prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7328A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7329branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7330@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7331@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7332detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7333positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7334
7335Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7336single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7337create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7338large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7339
7340@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7341@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7342@item --emit-stub-syms
7343This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7344symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7345
7346@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7347@kindex --dotsyms
7348@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7349@item --dotsyms
7350@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7351These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7352in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7353function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7354code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7355properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7356to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7357@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7358dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7359feature.
7360
7ae4ea7d
AM
7361@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7362@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7363@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7364@item --save-restore-funcs
7365@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7366These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7367provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7368@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7369function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7370link.
7371
2a60a7a8
AM
7372@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7373@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7374@item --no-tls-optimize
7375PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7376sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7377disable the optimization.
7378
7c9cf415
AM
7379@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7380@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7381@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7382@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7383@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7384These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7385stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7386an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7387@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7388stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7389option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7390Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7391slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7392application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7393normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7394
2a60a7a8
AM
7395@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7396@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7397@item --no-opd-optimize
7398PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7399corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7400the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7401Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7402
7403@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7404@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7405@item --non-overlapping-opd
7406Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7407@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7408the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7409entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7410
7411@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7412@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7413@item --no-toc-optimize
7414PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7415entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7416reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7417marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7418marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7419relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7420unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7421reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7422discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7423reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7424code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7425optimization.
7426
7427@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7428@kindex --no-multi-toc
7429@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7430If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7431@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7432where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7433entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7434total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7435grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7436TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7437calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7438help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
743964K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7440Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7441
7442@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7443@kindex --no-toc-sort
7444@item --no-toc-sort
7445By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7446happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7447placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7448with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7449referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7450@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7451results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7452off this feature.
7453
7454@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7455@kindex --plt-align
7456@kindex --no-plt-align
7457@item --plt-align
7458@itemx --no-plt-align
7459Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7460padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7461specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7462that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7463stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7464
7465@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7466@kindex --plt-static-chain
7467@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7468@item --plt-static-chain
7469@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7470Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7471chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7472chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7473
7474@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7475@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7476@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7477@item --plt-thread-safe
7478@itemx --no-thread-safe
7479With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7480lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7481another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7482order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7483memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7484barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7485looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7486seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7487default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7488@end table
7489
7490@ifclear GENERIC
7491@lowersections
7492@end ifclear
7493@end ifset
7494
49fa1e15
AM
7495@ifset SPU
7496@ifclear GENERIC
7497@raisesections
7498@end ifclear
7499
7500@node SPU ELF
7501@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7502
7503@cindex SPU ELF options
7504@table @option
7505
7506@cindex SPU plugins
7507@kindex --plugin
7508@item --plugin
7509This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7510
7511@cindex SPU overlays
7512@kindex --no-overlays
7513@item --no-overlays
7514Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7515regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7516@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7517turns off all this special overlay handling.
7518
7519@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7520@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7521@item --emit-stub-syms
7522This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7523symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7524
7525@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7526@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7527@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7528This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7529function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7530on calls to non-overlay regions.
7531
7532@cindex SPU local store size
7533@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7534@item --local-store=lo:hi
7535@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7536the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7537range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7538
c0065db7 7539@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7540@kindex --stack-analysis
7541@item --stack-analysis
7542SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7543unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7544under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7545@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7546@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7547determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7548for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7549for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7550for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7551find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7552and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7553under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7554dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7555is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7556and calls will be given.
7557
c0065db7 7558@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7559@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7560@item --emit-stack-syms
7561This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7562in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7563These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7564functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7565functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7566such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7567The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7568@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7569@end table
7570
7571@ifclear GENERIC
7572@lowersections
7573@end ifclear
7574@end ifset
7575
36f63dca
NC
7576@ifset TICOFF
7577@ifclear GENERIC
7578@raisesections
7579@end ifclear
7580
7581@node TI COFF
7582@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7583@cindex TI COFF versions
7584@kindex --format=@var{version}
7585The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7586TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7587also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7588format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7589header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7590
7591@ifclear GENERIC
7592@lowersections
7593@end ifclear
7594@end ifset
7595
2ca22b03
NC
7596@ifset WIN32
7597@ifclear GENERIC
7598@raisesections
7599@end ifclear
7600
7601@node WIN32
7602@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7603
c0065db7 7604This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7605See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7606command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7607
7608@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7609@cindex import libraries
7610@item import libraries
69da35b5 7611The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7612libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7613regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7614archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7615support for creating such libraries provided with the
7616@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7617
c0065db7
RM
7618@item exporting DLL symbols
7619@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7620The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7621
7622@table @emph
7623@item using auto-export functionality
7624@cindex using auto-export functionality
7625By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7626which is controlled by the following command line options:
7627
0a5d968e
NC
7628@itemize
7629@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7630@item --exclude-symbols
7631@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7632@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7633@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7634@end itemize
7635
09e2aba4
DK
7636When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7637(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7638symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7639often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7640private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7641options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7642exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7643final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7644
7645If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7646command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7647if either of the following are true:
7648
7649@itemize
7650@item A DEF file is used.
7651@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7652@end itemize
dc8465bf 7653
c0065db7
RM
7654@item using a DEF file
7655@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7656Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7657an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7658exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7659name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7660command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7661
7662@example
7663gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7664@end example
7665
0a5d968e
NC
7666Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7667@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7668
dc8465bf
NC
7669Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7670
7671@example
4b5bd4e7 7672LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7673
7674EXPORTS
7675foo
7676bar
7677_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7678another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7679var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7680doo = foo == foo2
7681eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7682@end example
dc8465bf 7683
7fcab871 7684This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7685symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7686alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7687by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7688@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7689@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7690export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7691in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7692symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7693
6b31ad16
DS
7694The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7695name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7696the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7697
b45619c0
NC
7698When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7699library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7700@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7701executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7702
7703With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7704specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7705non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7706
7707If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7708or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7709filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7710
4b5bd4e7
DS
7711The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7712
7713@example
7714EXPORTS
7715 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7716 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7717 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7718@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7719
7720Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7721@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7722@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7723@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7724Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7725@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7726string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7727
7728The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7729
7730@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7731will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7732by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7733linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7734library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7735
7736@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7737The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7738the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7739@code{*_imp__foo}).
7740
7741@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7742well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7743read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7744variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7745the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7746extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7747application will behave unexpectedly.
7748
7749@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7750it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7751symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7752API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7753the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7754
4b5bd4e7
DS
7755See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7756other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7757
7758@cindex creating a DEF file
7759While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7760with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7761
7762@item Using decorations
7763@cindex Using decorations
7764Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7765itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7766declared as:
7767
7768@example
7769__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7770__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7771@end example
7772
7773All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7774any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7775this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7776the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7777
7778Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7779decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7780instead:
7781
7782@example
7783__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7784__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7785@end example
7786
c0065db7
RM
7787This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7788when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7789variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7790code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7791of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7792omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7793@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7794information.
c0065db7 7795@end table
dc8465bf 7796
2ca22b03
NC
7797@cindex automatic data imports
7798@item automatic data imports
7799The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7800by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7801compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7802issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7803code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7804c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7805initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7806decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7807platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7808command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7809The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7810suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7811trigger the feature's use.
7812
c0065db7 7813auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7814additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7815
c0065db7 7816"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7817documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7818
c0065db7
RM
7819The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7820occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7821One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7822below.
7823
7824@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7825For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7826object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7827offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7828field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7829in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7830without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7831The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7832references.
7833
c0065db7
RM
7834The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7835be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7836themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7837runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7838compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7839support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7840run without error on an older system.
7841
c0065db7
RM
7842@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7843enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7844
7845@cindex direct linking to a dll
7846@item direct linking to a dll
7847The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7848including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7849libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7850traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7851libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7852function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7853though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7854storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7855tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7856large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7857
c0065db7 7858Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7859@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7860of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7861perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7862select the dll instead of an import library.
7863
2ca22b03 7864
69da35b5
NC
7865For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7866to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7867
7868@example
45e948fe
NC
7869libxxx.dll.a
7870xxx.dll.a
7871libxxx.a
7872xxx.lib
69da35b5 7873cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7874libxxx.dll
7875xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7876@end example
7877
69da35b5
NC
7878before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7879
c0065db7
RM
7880(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7881where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7882@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7883file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7884@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7885
c0065db7
RM
7886Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7887@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7888was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7889various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7890could coexist on the same machine.
7891
2ca22b03
NC
7892The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7893applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7894libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7895
7896@example
7897bin/
7898 cygxxx.dll
7899lib/
7900 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7901 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7902@end example
7903
c0065db7
RM
7904Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7905done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7906
79071. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7908@example
7909gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7910@end example
2ca22b03 7911
69da35b5
NC
7912However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7913(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7914@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7915not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7916
2ca22b03
NC
79172. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7918directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7919should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7920making the app/dll.
7921
7922@example
7923ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7924@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7925
7926Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7927
7928@example
7929gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7930@end example
69da35b5
NC
7931
7932This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7933perfectly legal
7934
7935@example
7936bin/
7937 cygxxx-5.dll
7938lib/
c0065db7 7939 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7940@end example
7941
dc8465bf 7942Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7943even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7944@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7945
7946Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7947wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7948
79491. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7950work with auto-imported data.
7951
dc8465bf
NC
79522. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7953import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7954symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7955for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7956possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7957
45e948fe
NC
79583. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7959critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7960in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7961stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7962
69da35b5 7963So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7964true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7965a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7966binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7967massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7968requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7969will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7970
c0065db7 7971@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7972@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7973@item adding additional names
7974Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7975A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7976exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7977when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7978import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7979
c0065db7 7980@example
dc8465bf
NC
7981LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7982
7983EXPORTS
c0065db7 7984foo
dc8465bf 7985_foo = foo
c0065db7 7986@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7987
7988The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7989
7990Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7991source code using the "weak" attribute:
7992
c0065db7
RM
7993@example
7994void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7995void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7996@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7997
7998See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7999symbols.
8000
8001@item renaming symbols
8002Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8003kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8004@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8005DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8006created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8007
c0065db7 8008@example
dc8465bf
NC
8009LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8010
8011EXPORTS
8012_foo = foo
c0065db7 8013@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8014
8015The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8016@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8017@end table
dc8465bf 8018
0a5d968e 8019Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 8020unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 8021If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8022@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8023that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8024@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8025renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8026to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8027the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8028In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8029which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8030
8031@cindex weak externals
8032@item weak externals
8033The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8034weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8035defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8036are three variants of weak externals:
8037@itemize
8038@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8039called lazy externals.
8040@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8041This form is not presently implemented.
8042@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8043implemented.
8044@end itemize
8045As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8046are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8047uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8048
8049@cindex aligned common symbols
8050@item aligned common symbols
8051As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8052desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8053the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8054carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8055by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8056tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8057but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8058warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8059
2ca22b03
NC
8060@end table
8061
8062@ifclear GENERIC
8063@lowersections
8064@end ifclear
8065@end ifset
8066
e0001a05
NC
8067@ifset XTENSA
8068@ifclear GENERIC
8069@raisesections
8070@end ifclear
8071
8072@node Xtensa
8073@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8074
8075@cindex Xtensa processors
8076The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8077@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8078specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8079keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8080example, with the command:
8081
8082@smallexample
8083SECTIONS
8084@{
8085 .text : @{
8086 *(.literal .text)
8087 @}
8088@}
8089@end smallexample
8090
8091@noindent
8092@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8093and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8094literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8095interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8096group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8097files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8098and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8099
43cd72b9 8100@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8101@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8102Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8103provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8104is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8105literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8106will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8107location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8108the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8109unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8110@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8111range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8112
8113For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8114to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8115instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8116instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8117instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8118@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8119hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8120By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8121switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8122density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8123instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8124performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8125linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8126a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8127
8128The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8129control the linker:
8130
8131@cindex Xtensa options
8132@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8133@item --size-opt
8134When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8135more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8136no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8137alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8138preserve the correctness of the code.
8139@end table
e0001a05
NC
8140
8141@ifclear GENERIC
8142@lowersections
8143@end ifclear
8144@end ifset
8145
252b5132
RH
8146@ifclear SingleFormat
8147@node BFD
8148@chapter BFD
8149
8150@cindex back end
8151@cindex object file management
8152@cindex object formats available
8153@kindex objdump -i
8154The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8155These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8156object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8157format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8158it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8159associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8160object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8161(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8162list all the formats available for your configuration.
8163
8164@cindex BFD requirements
8165@cindex requirements for BFD
8166As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8167several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8168BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8169formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8170been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8171BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8172may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8173
8174One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8175mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8176useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8177conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8178
8179@menu
8180* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8181@end menu
8182
8183@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8184@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8185@cindex opening object files
8186@include bfdsumm.texi
8187@end ifclear
8188
8189@node Reporting Bugs
8190@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8191@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8192@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8193
ff5dcc92 8194Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8195
8196Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8197it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8198to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8199work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8200@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8201
8202In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8203information that enables us to fix the bug.
8204
8205@menu
8206* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8207* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8208@end menu
8209
8210@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8211@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8212@cindex bug criteria
8213
8214If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8215
8216@itemize @bullet
8217@cindex fatal signal
8218@cindex linker crash
8219@cindex crash of linker
8220@item
8221If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8222@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8223
8224@cindex error on valid input
8225@item
ff5dcc92 8226If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8227
8228@cindex invalid input
8229@item
ff5dcc92 8230If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8231may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8232object files are correct.
8233
8234@item
8235If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8236improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8237@end itemize
8238
8239@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8240@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8241@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8242@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8243
8244A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8245products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8246recommend you contact that organization first.
8247
8248You can find contact information for many support companies and
8249individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8250distribution.
8251
ad22bfe8 8252@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8253Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8254@value{BUGURL}.
8255@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8256
8257The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8258@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8259fact or leave it out, state it!
8260
8261Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8262problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8263assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8264matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8265the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8266location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8267were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8268into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8269specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8270and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8271
8272Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8273the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8274on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8275
8276Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8277bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8278respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8279You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8280
8281To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8282
8283@itemize @bullet
8284@item
ff5dcc92 8285The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8286the @samp{--version} argument.
8287
8288Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8289the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8290
8291@item
ff5dcc92 8292Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8293patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8294
8295@item
8296The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8297version number.
8298
8299@item
ff5dcc92 8300What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8301``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8302
8303@item
8304The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8305observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8306list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8307sufficient.
8308
8309If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8310and then we might not encounter the bug.
8311
8312@item
8313A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8314bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8315provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8316bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8317state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8318requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8319we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8320attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8321
8322If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8323@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8324object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8325@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8326how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8327
8328@item
8329A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8330incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8331
ff5dcc92 8332Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8333will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8334not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8335a chance to make a mistake.
8336
8337Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8338say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8339copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8340C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8341and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8342fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8343you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8344any conclusion from our observations.
8345
8346@item
ff5dcc92 8347If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8348diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8349@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8350If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8351context, not by line number.
8352
8353The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8354sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8355@end itemize
8356
8357Here are some things that are not necessary:
8358
8359@itemize @bullet
8360@item
8361A description of the envelope of the bug.
8362
8363Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8364which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8365changes will not affect it.
8366
8367This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8368will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8369with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8370We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8371
8372Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8373of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8374output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8375less time, and so on.
8376
8377However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8378report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8379
8380@item
8381A patch for the bug.
8382
8383A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8384the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8385a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8386to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8387
ff5dcc92 8388Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8389construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8390through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8391able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8392fixed.
8393
8394And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8395patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8396help us to understand.
8397
8398@item
8399A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8400
8401Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8402things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8403@end itemize
8404
8405@node MRI
8406@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8407@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8408To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8409linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8410alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8411described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8412simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8413@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8414linker commands; these commands are described here.
8415
8416In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8417file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8418features to make use of them.
8419
8420You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8421@samp{-c} command-line option.
8422
8423Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8424command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8425blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8426MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8427issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8428
8429Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8430
8431You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8432lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8433The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8434
8435@table @code
8436@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8437@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8438@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8439Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8440the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8441@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8442your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8443script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8444commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8445input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8446@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8447
8448@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8449@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8450Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8451in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8452
8453@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8454
8455@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8456@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8457Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8458@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8459
8460@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8461@item BASE @var{expression}
8462Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8463absolute addresses) in the output file.
8464
8465@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8466@item CHIP @var{expression}
8467@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8468This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8469
8470@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8471@item END
8472This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8473
8474@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8475@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8476Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8477language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8478
8479@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8480@item
252b5132
RH
8481S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8482
8483@item
8484IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8485
8486@item
8487COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8488@samp{COFF}
8489@end enumerate
8490
8491@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8492@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8493Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8494@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8495
8496The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8497same line, with no change in its effect.
8498
8499@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8500@item LOAD @var{filename}
8501@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8502Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8503same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8504command line.
8505
8506@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8507@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8508@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8509MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8510option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8511
8512@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8513@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8514@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8515Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8516order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8517script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8518sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8519file, in the order specified.
8520
8521@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8522@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8523@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8524@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8525Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8526@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8527
8528@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8529@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8530@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8531@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8532You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8533specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8534If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8535@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8536@end table
8537
793c5807
NC
8538@node GNU Free Documentation License
8539@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8540@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8541
370b66a1
CD
8542@node LD Index
8543@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8544
8545@printindex cp
8546
8547@tex
7ca01ed9 8548% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8549% meantime:
8550\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8551\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8552\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8553\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8554\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8555\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8556\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8557\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8558\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8559% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8560@end tex
8561
252b5132 8562@bye